JP2006270993A - End-to-end communication connection control system for full ip services - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a method for performing telephone communication and audio/image communication via an IP network and a mobile communications network, and to provide a method for a fixed-telephone service and a mobile-telephone service. <P>SOLUTION: An IP encapsulation technique, a simple encapsulation technique, a method of applying common-channel interoffice signaling to the IP network, a multi-cast function of registering the address of a terminal in a network node apparatus, a method of acquiring an IP address by using the telephone number as a domain name, a method of distinguishing a port number from an IP packet, and the like are combined to apply an inter-end communication connection control, based on the common-channel interoffice signaling to establish a communication channel extending over the mobile communication network, a public telephone switching network, and the IP network, and thereafter, perform inter-end communication between a terminal 1 and a terminal 2. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2007,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to an inter-terminal communication connection control method for linking an IP network (also referred to as an IP transfer network) with another communication network, an inter-terminal connection control method for an IP network to which a common line signal system is applied, and an IP network multicast technique. For an IP full service including an inter-terminal connection control method, an apparatus for realizing inter-terminal communication connection control, an inter-terminal communication connection control system for an IP service that is either a multicast service or a TV conference service, or a combination thereof. The present invention relates to an inter-terminal communication connection control system. Other communication networks include, in addition to the IP network, a mobile communication network used for a public switched telephone network (PSTN) or a mobile phone.

  As prior art related to the present invention, Japanese Patent No. 3084861 (hereinafter referred to as “prior patent”) by the present applicant, and Japanese Patent Application No. 2001-078270 (hereinafter referred to as “prior application”) by the present applicant, There is.

  In the integrated information communication system, which is an IP packet transfer network that employs an IP encapsulation technique, the prior patent describes an IP encapsulation technique, a technique for dynamically setting an address management table according to a request from an IP terminal, and a telephone number as a domain. A method of acquiring an IP address by presenting it to a name server and registering the acquired address in an address management table is realized. In addition, the prior application describes a method for applying simple encapsulation, a method for applying No. 7 common line signaling to an IP network, and a user's terminal address to a network node device in an inter-terminal communication connection method using an IP packet transfer network. A method for registering and performing multicasting is disclosed.

Note that some of the terms used in the prior patents and the prior applications may not match the terms used in the present invention. Therefore, to avoid confusion, the terms used in the prior patents and the prior applications are in parentheses. Shown together. For example, when a network node device (access control device) is described, the access control device is a term used in the prior patent or the prior application.
<< IP encapsulation technique >>
The IP encapsulation technique disclosed in the prior patent is outlined with reference to FIG. In this example, an external IP packet 13-1 is transmitted from the IP terminal 12-1 having the external IP address “EA01” to the IP terminal 12-2 having the external IP address “EA02” via the IP network 11-1. Forward. The termination (logical terminal) of the logical communication line 12-3 is identified by the logical terminal identifier “Pin1”, and the termination of the logical communication line 12-4 is identified by the logical terminal identifier “Pin2”. The internal IP address “IA01” is assigned to the logical terminal “Pin1”, and the internal IP address “IA02” is assigned to the logical terminal “Pin2”. When the network node device 11-2 receives the external IP packet 13-1, the internal IP address given to the logical terminal “Pin1” to which the IP packet 13-1 is input is “IA01”, and the IP packet 13-1 It is confirmed that the destination external IP address is “EA02”, the inside of the address management table 11-8 is searched, the source internal IP address is “IA01” first, and then the destination external IP address is “EA02” "Is included, and it is checked whether the detected record includes" EA01 "as the source external IP address in the IP packet 13-1. In this example, it is a record including “Pin1, IA01, IA02, EA01, EA02” on the second line from the top, and an IP packet 13-2 is formed using IP addresses “IA01” and “IA02” inside this record. (IP packet encapsulation)

The internal IP packet 13-2 reaches the network node device 11-3 via the routers 11-4, 11-5, and 11-6. The network node device 11-2 removes the IP header of the received internal IP packet 13-2 (IP packet decapsulation), sends the obtained external IP packet 13-3 to the communication line 12-4, and receives the IP terminal. 12-2 receives the external IP packet 13-3. The record “Pin1, IA01, IA81, EA01, EA81” on the first line of the address management table 11-8 is an external IP address “EA81” and an external IP address directed to the server 11-7 having the internal IP address “IA81”. Used to encapsulate IP packets. The destination of the external IP packet can be changed by changing the destination external IP address inside the external IP packet input from the same logical terminal (termination part of the logical communication line 12-3) to “EA01”, “EA81”, etc. It is like that. Note that a mask technique in IP encapsulation is known and is shown and described in FIG. 362 of the prior application, for example.
<< Simple encapsulation technique >>
With reference to FIG. 231, the simplified encapsulation technique disclosed in the prior application is outlined. An internal packet formed by simple encapsulation includes a destination internal address, but differs from the above IP encapsulation in that it does not include a source internal address. The termination (logic terminal) of the logical communication line 22-3 is identified by the logical terminal identifier “Pin1”, and the termination of the logical communication line 22-4 is identified by the logical terminal identifier “Pin2”. The internal IP address “IA01” is assigned to the logical terminal “Pin1”, and the internal IP address “IA02” is assigned to the logical terminal “Pin2”. In this example, the external IP packet 23-1 is transferred from the IP terminal 22-1 having the external IP address "EA01" to the IP terminal 22-2 having the external IP address "EA02". When the network node device 21-2 receives the external IP packet 23-1, the internal IP address given to the logical terminal “Pin1” to which the IP packet 23-1 is input is “IA01”, and the IP packet 23-1 It is confirmed that the destination external IP address is “EA02”, the address management table 21-8 is searched, the source internal IP address is “IA01” first, and then the destination external IP address “EA02” is The included record is searched, and it is further checked whether or not the detected record includes the source external IP address “EA01” in the IP packet 23-1. In this example, it is a record including “Pin1, IA01, IA02, EA01, EA02” on the second line from the top, and the destination IP address is “IA02” using the IP addresses “IA01” and “IA02” in this record. An IP packet 13-2 having a simple header is formed (simple encapsulation). The internal IP packet 23-2 reaches the network node device 21-3 via the routers 21-4, 21-5, and 21-6. The network node device 21-2 removes the simple header of the received internal packet 23-2 (simple decapsulation) and sends the obtained external IP packet 23-3 to the communication line 22-4. As an internal packet, for example, it can be realized by a communication two-layer optical frame including only a destination address, and MAPOS is known as such an optical frame.

For both IP encapsulation and simple IP encapsulation, as the logical terminal identifier, for example, a logical terminal identification number at the end of the communication line or an address (physical address, MAC address, etc.) of the communication layer 2 may be used. it can. Similarly to the IP encapsulation technique, the destination of the external IP packet can be changed by changing the destination external IP address in the external IP packet input from the same logical terminal.
<< Technique for Dynamically Setting Address Management Table by Request of IP Terminal >>
In Example 35 of the prior patent, a method for changing the setting contents of the address management table (conversion table) inside the network node device (access control device) from the user's IP terminal is disclosed, and will be described with reference to FIG. To do.

The IP terminal 23-1 transmits an external IP packet (ICS user frame) including the domain name “c5.b2.a1” to the conversion table server 23-2 (Step 23-4). The conversion table server 23-2 makes an inquiry to the domain name server 23-3 (step 23-5), and the domain name server 23-3 has an internal address (ICS network address) corresponding to the domain name “c5.b2.a1” and an external address. The IP address (ICS user address) is searched and acquired (step 23-6). And it returns to the conversion table server 23-2 (step 23-7), the conversion table server 23-2 writes in the conversion table (step 23-8), and reports to the IP terminal 23-1 (step 23-9). .
<< Method of obtaining IP address using telephone number as domain name >>
Next, in Example 36 of the prior patent, by using a telephone number as a domain name, an IP packet (ICS user frame) can be transmitted and received with a communication partner, and the IP packet is digitized. It discloses that voice is stored, and thus public communication by telephone is possible. The address management server (conversion table server) converts the input domain name into an external IP address (ICS user address) and sends it back, and sends the internal address (ICS network address) to the network node device (access). Register in the internal address management table (conversion table).

The telephone number “1234-5678” input to the telephone is delivered to the conversion table server via the telephone number input unit of the telephone, and the conversion table server 24-4 (FIG. 233) receives the received telephone number “1234-56784”. ”To multiple domain name servers 24-1, 24-2, and 24-3 one after another (24-6 to 24-11 in FIG. 233), and the telephone number“ 1234-5678 ”is the domain name. The internal address and external IP address of the telephone of the communication partner at the time of being considered as are acquired. Next, the conversion table server 24-4 creates a new item to be added to the address management table (conversion table) in the network node apparatus using the two acquired addresses, and transmits it to the requesting telephone set. Further, the network node device uses the new item of the address management table as a new element of the address management table inside the network node device.
<< Method of applying No.7 common line signal system to IP network >>
In the technique disclosed in the prior application, as shown in FIG. 234, connection servers 25-5 to 25-6 and a relay connection server 25-7 are provided inside the IP network 25, and terminals 25-1 and 25-2 are provided. Is connected to the connection server via the media routers 25-3 to 25-4. The connection server and the relay server are also called a telephone management server. The connection servers 25-5 and 25-6 are provided with a function similar to the line connection control of the subscriber switch (LS) of the public switched telephone network (PSTN), and the relay switch (TS) The function similar to the line connection control of) is given. An initial address message (IAM) and an address completion message that a terminal such as a telephone, an IP terminal, and a video terminal can associate 1: 1 with a No. 7 common line signaling line connection control message via an IP network (ACM), a call progress message (CPG), a response message (ANM), a release message (REL), and a release completion message (RLC) are transmitted and received, thereby realizing an inter-terminal communication connection control method using an IP network. Note that there is no relay connection server 25-7, and a method for controlling communication connection between terminals between the two connection servers 25-5 and 25-6 is also possible.

  The user inputs the destination telephone number from the terminal 25-1 (step Zl), the media router 25-3 returns call setting acceptance (step Z2), and the media router 25-3 receives the destination telephone number and the source telephone number. (Step Y1), and the IAM packet sent from the connection server 25-5 passes through the connection server 25-6 (steps Y2, Y3) to the media router 25-4. Arrive (step Y4). The media router 25-4 requests call setting from the terminal 25-2 (step Z4), and the connection server 25-6 returns an ACM packet (steps Y5 and Y6). The terminal 25-2 reports a ring tone (step Z7), and the media router 25-4 transmits a call incoming call to the connection server 25-6 (step Y7). The connection server 25-6 transmits the CPG packet (steps Y8 and Y9), and the ringing tone is notified to the terminal 25-1 via the media router 25-3 (steps Y10 and Z10). In response to the call setting request, the terminal 25-2 is notified to the connection server 25-6 (steps Z11 and Y11), the connection server 25-6 forms and transmits an ANM packet, and the terminal 25-1 transmits the call phase. (Steps Y12 to Y14, Step Z14).

When the user ends the call of the terminal 25-1, a disconnection request from the terminal 25-1 is notified (step Z16), and a series of REL packets indicating release requests and RLC packets indicating completion of the release requests are transmitted and received. The call connection ends (steps Y16 to Y23, steps Z22 and Z23). A step (Y2, Y3, etc.) between the connection server 25-5 and the connection server 25-6 is called NNI, and a step (Y1, Y4, etc.) between the connection server and the media router is called UNI.
<< Specific example between IP network and public switched telephone network applying No.7 common line signaling system >>
The thirteenth through sixteenth embodiments of the prior application adopt the concept of the common line signal system, and are characterized by separating the inside of the IP network into a control communication line and a voice communication line. A communication connection control method between telephones via the Internet is disclosed. In FIG. 235, 40-1 is an IP network, 40-2 is a public switched telephone network, 40-3 is a termination gateway, 40-4 is a relay gateway, 40-5 is an IP communication line, and 40-6 is a common line signal system. A control communication line 40-7 is a voice communication line. 40-8 is a control IP communication line, and 40-9 is a voice IP communication line. 41-1 and 41-2 are telephones, 41-3 is a media router, 42-1 is a relay switch, 42-2 is a subscriber switch, 42-3 is a relay control unit (STP), and 42-4 is a voice control unit. , 42-5 are termination control units (SEP). 43-1 is a proxy telephone server, 43-2 is a telephone management server, 43-3 is a telephone number server, 43-4 and 43-5 are table management servers, 44-1 and 44-2 are network node devices, 44- Reference numerals 3, 44-4, 44-5, and 44-6 are routers. The relay control unit 42-3 is assigned an IP address, and the relay control unit 42-3 is a common line signaling relay signal station (STP) when viewed from the public switched telephone network 40-2. Has been granted.

  A termination control unit 42-5 in FIG. 235 corresponds to the connection server 25-5 in FIG. 234, and a relay control unit 42-3 in FIG. 235 corresponds to the relay connection server 25-7 in FIG. Here, “correspondence” means that the termination control unit 42-5 and the relay control unit 42-3 have a function of performing line connection control by a common line signal system.

  When the telephone 41-1 requests the telephone 41-2 to set a telephone call, the media router 41-3, the network node device 44-1, the termination control unit 42-5, the routers 44-4 and 44-5, and the relay control unit 42 -3, via the control communication line 40-6, the exchange 42-1, and the exchange 42-2, an initial address message (IAM), an address completion message (ACM), a call progress message (CPG), and a response message (ANM) The inter-terminal communication connection control using the IP network is performed by transmitting / receiving a release message (REL), a release completion message (RLC), and the like. Here, the voice transmitted from the telephone 41-1 includes the media router 41-3, the network node device 44-1, the router 44-6, the network node device 44-2, the voice IP communication line 40-9, and the voice control unit. 42-4, the voice communication line 40-7, the exchange 42-1, and the exchange 42-2 to reach the telephone 41-2.

  The relay control unit 42-3 determines various parameters determined by the common line signaling method, for example, a line number (CIC) and a signal link selection (SLS), according to the rules previously determined with the public switched telephone network 40-2. The relay control unit 42-3 writes the signal station address, signal link selection, and line number of the relay control unit 42-3 together with the media path identifier in the address connection table 45-1. The relay control unit 42-3 manages the gateway address management table 45-2. The gateway address management table 45-2 is searched, and the IP address of the gateway managing the destination telephone number, that is, the destination telephone number The IP of the gateway for connecting to a telephone having The relay control unit 42-3 manages the signal station address management table 45-3, and can search the signal station address management table to obtain the signal station address of the exchange in the public switched telephone network 40-2. it can. The relay control unit 42-3 notifies the voice control unit 42-4 via the information line 45-5, and the voice control unit 42-4 writes and writes the notified information as a record of the media path connection table 45-4. Report completion. The media path identifier is used to identify a voice communication path used for a telephone call (connection / call / release) between telephones. The voice control unit 42-4 defines a logical communication line for transmitting voice from the voice control unit 42-4 to the voice communication line 40-7, and the logical communication line identifier is recorded in the record of the media path connection table 45-4. Is supposed to write as

  The voice control unit 42-4 converts the voice stored in the IP packet sent from the voice IP communication line 40-9 into a format that can be transferred within the public switched telephone network 40-2, and converts the voice communication line 40- 7 to send. Also, the voice control unit 42-4 converts a voice frame sent from the voice communication line 40-7 of the public switched telephone network 40-2 into an IP packet format and transmits it to the voice IP communication line 40-9. The voice control unit has an IP address for sending and receiving voice IP packets therein, and is used for setting the media path connection table 45-4.

  The prior application discloses a technique for storing and transferring a message (IAM, ACM,..., REL, etc.) for telephone line connection control in an IP packet (FIG. 142 of the tenth embodiment, etc.). Line control conforming to the No. 7 common line signal system is applied to the upper three layers (network layer) of the communication layer.

  Line connection control messages (IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLC) conforming to the No. 7 common line signal system are set in the payload portion of the internal IP packet. This will be described with reference to protocol stacks 59-1 and 59-2 (FIG. 236). For the specification of the protocol type, which is an item in the header of the internal IP packet, “CC” (Connection Control) representing line connection control (also called call connection control) is defined as a new prototype, and the internal IP packet A method for storing the line connection control messages in the payload portion of the packet, and a method for specifying the protocol type as “ICMP” as another method and storing the line connection control messages in the ICMP message area in the internal IP packet There is.

  As another method, there is a method of designating the protocol type as “UDP” and storing the line connection control messages in the payload portion of the UDP segment in the payload of the internal IP packet. The protocol stack 59-1 is a method in which a data link layer is provided above the physical layer as the lowest layer, an IP layer (network layer) is provided above it, and a new circuit connection control layer (CC layer) is provided above it. The protocol stack 59-2 is a method in which a UDP layer is placed above the IP layer, and a circuit connection control layer (CC layer) is provided on the UDP layer.

  As shown in FIG. 237 (part of FIG. 232 of the prior application), the 14th embodiment of the prior application is connected to the telephone 1421 from the telephone 1420 via the public telephone switching network 1405, the IP network 1400, and the public telephone switching network 1406. A terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method for telephone communication is described, and the scope of the present invention will be outlined.

  When the handset of the telephone 1420 is lifted, the common line signal type signal unit 1451 is transferred to the relay control unit 1423 in the relay gateway 1401 via the control communication line 1415. The destination signal station code of the signal unit 1451 is “DPC-1”, the source signal station code is “OPC-1”, the signal link selection is “SLS-1”, the line number is “CIC-1”, and the message is “IAM”. ", The parameter is" Para-1 ", and the content of the parameter" Para-1 "includes the telephone number" TN-1 "of the telephone set 1420 and the telephone number" TN-2 "of the telephone set 1421. The relay control unit 1423 receives the signal unit 1451 and forms an IP packet 1452. The destination IP address of the IP packet 1452 is “D-ad-x”, the source IP address is “S-ad-x”, the line number is “CIC-x”, and the telephone number “TN-1” of the telephone 1420 And the telephone number “TN-2” of the telephone set 1421. The relay control unit 1423 transmits the IP packet 1452 formed above to the inside of the IP network 1400. The IP packet 1452 reaches the relay control unit 1424 in the relay gateway 1402, and is converted into a signal unit 1453 by the relay control unit 1424. The telephone 1421 is reached via the public switched telephone network 1406. The relay control unit 1423 and the voice control unit 1427 exchange information such as a port number via the information line 1429-1.

  FIG. 238 shows the function of the relay control unit 1423 in the relay gateway 1401 separated from the communication function layer. The signal unit 1451 sent from the control communication line 1415 is used as the communication function layer in the common line signal system. Connected to MTP. The communication function layer 1423-1 is responsible for communication processing related to the destination signal station code DPC-1, the source signal station code OPC-1, and the signal link selection SLS-1 in the signal unit 1451. The communication function layer 1423-2 is in charge of communication processing related to the message IAM, the line number CIC-1, and the parameters in the signal unit 1451. On the other hand, the communication function layer 1423-3 is in charge of communication processing related to the destination IP address D-adx and the source IP address S-adx included in the IP packet 1452. The communication function layer 1423-4 is in charge of communication processing related to the message IAM and the line number CIC-x in the IP packet 1452.

As described above, the gist is that the communication function layers 1423-2 and 1423-4 perform mutual conversion between the packet 7451 of the No. 7 common line signal system and the packet 1452 according to the provisions of the prior application.
<< Overview of Multicast >>
Next, a multicast type IP network 27-1 for transferring from one delivery source to a plurality of destinations will be described with reference to FIG.

  Each of the routers 27-11 to 27-20 holds a multicast table. The IP packet 29-1 having the multicast address “MA1” is transmitted from the IP terminal 28-1, reaches the router 27-18 via the router 27-11, and is multicast by router held by the router 27-18. Referring to the table, IP packet 29-3 and IP packet 29-4 are transferred to the communication line. The IP packet 29-3 is copied by the router 27-17 to become IP packets 29-5 and 29-6, and the IP packet 29-5 is copied by the router 27-12 to become IP packets 29-8 and 29-9. Reach the IP terminals 28-2 and 28-3, respectively. The IP packet 29-6 is copied by the router 27-13 to become IP packets 29-10 and 29-11, which reach the IP terminals 28-4 and 28-5, respectively. The IP packet 29-4 passes through the routers 27-19 and 27-14, and the copied IP packets 29-12 and 29-13 reach the IP terminals 28-6 and 28-7, respectively.

Note that a method of storing multicast data in a UDP segment in an IP packet and transferring it is known, and can be applied to the multicast. The routers 27-11 to 27-14 shown in FIG. 101 are network node devices. The technique disclosed in the eighteenth embodiment of the prior application registers the address of a terminal in the address management table of the network node device. In addition, by means of inspecting the address contained in the multicast data to be sent and received, unauthorized transmission of multicast data is suppressed to improve information security, and multicast IP packet communication capable of charging multicast data recipients is realized. ing.
<< Example of multicast communication >>
This is an example disclosed as Example 20 of the prior application, and will be described with reference to FIG. Within the IP network 31-1, the management range 31-2 of the communication company X and the management range 31-3 of the communication company Y, network node devices 32-1 to 32-12, routers 34-1 to 34-11, A router 34-12 is installed. The network node device and the router are directly connected via an IP communication line or indirectly via the network node device or the router. Terminals 33-1 to 33-17 having an IP packet transmission / reception function are connected to a network node device via an IP communication line. 33-24 to 33-27 are multicast P service proxy servers, 33-28 to 33-31 are multicast Q service proxy servers, and 33-32 to 33-35 are overflow communication line servers. The communication company X and the communication company Y jointly manage the router 34-12. Note that the multicast method for performing IP encapsulation is disclosed in Example 17 (FIG. 273, etc.) of the prior patent application.
<< Communication company sending terminal and sending office server >>
The electronic newspaper delivery service by the A newspaper company is classified as the multicast P service, and the news distribution service by the B broadcasting station is classified as the multicast Q service. Terminal 33-1 is a multicast data transmission terminal managed by communication company X, terminal 33-2 is a transmission office server managed by communication company X, terminal 33-4 is a multicast data transmission terminal managed by communication company Y, terminal 33- 6 is a transmission office server managed by the telecommunications company Y, and a terminal 33-7 is a terminal managed by the A newspaper company. This is a terminal for multicast P service which transmits to the transmission office server 33-6 and performs office communication communication regarding electronic newspaper delivery. The terminal 33-3 is a terminal managed by the B broadcast station. The TV news distribution service provided by the B broadcast station (sound moving image) is transmitted to the transmission office server 33-2 of the communication company X and the transmission office server 33 of the communication company Y. This is a terminal for multicast Q service that transmits to -6 and performs office communication communication regarding electronic newspaper delivery. The transmission office server 33-2 transmits multicast data such as delivery of an electronic newspaper created by the A newspaper company on behalf of the communication company X, a TV news distribution service by a B broadcasting station, an electronic stock price guidance service by a C securities company, etc. Similarly, the transmission office server 33-6 performs an office procedure related to transmission of multicast data on behalf of the communication company Y.
<< Data distribution via multicast service proxy server >>
Furthermore, a multicast technique in which a multicast service proxy server intervenes is disclosed in the prior application patent, which will be described below (see FIG. 325 of the prior application patent). Multicast data sent from the sending terminal and transferred through the IP forwarding network reaches the multicast service proxy server installed on the receiving side, the multicast service proxy server receives the multicast data, and then the multicast service proxy A technique in which a server transmits the multicast data to a plurality of terminals connected to the network node device using a multicast data distribution function in the network node device, and the plurality of terminals receives the multicast data. It is disclosed.
<< Mobile terminal >>
In the prior application, a technique of communicating from a mobile terminal via a wireless communication path is disclosed, which will be outlined with reference to FIG. The text data is transmitted from the IP terminal 128-1, reaches the wireless transmission / reception unit 123 in the IP transfer network 120 via the wireless interface conversion unit 129-1, the wireless transmission / reception unit 127, and the wireless communication path 125, respectively. The network node device 121 is reached via the network, is transferred through the IP transfer network 120, and reaches another terminal via another network node device. Similarly, the digital voice transmitted from the IP telephone 128-2 reaches another telephone via the IP transfer network. The voice and image data are the same as those of the IP voice image apparatus 128-3, and reach the other IP voice image apparatus via the IP transfer network.
<< Telephone communication via media router >>
Techniques for telephoning via a media router are disclosed in prior applications and are outlined with reference to FIGS. 242 and 243. In this example, the media router 1021 has an IP address “EA1” and the media router 1022 has an IP address “EA2”. The digital voice is stored in an IP packet to which a local IP address is assigned, is transmitted from the telephone set 1011, and reaches the media router 1021. Next, the media router 1021 becomes an external IP packet having a source address “EA1” and a destination address “EA2”, and the external IP packet reaches the network node device 1031 via the communication line 1040. The record in the first row of the address management table 1034 is used as an internal packet. The internal packet is transferred through the IP forwarding network and reaches the network node device 1032. The internal packet is decapsulated and the external IP packet. Is restored, reaches the media router 1022 via the communication line 1041, is stored in the IP packet to which the local IP address is assigned, and reaches the telephone set 1012.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 244, another disclosed example of the other media router 1021-1 is shown. The connection control unit 1080-1 is an example having an external address “EA1”. The voice transmitted from the telephone set 1011-1 having the telephone number “Tel-No-1” reaches the telephone control unit 1081-1 via the pin number “T1” at the end of the communication line. The connection control unit 1080-1 refers to the record “Tel-No-1, T1, 5004” in the first row of the internal telephone number / pin number / UDP port number correspondence table 1083, and refers to the port number “5004”. , And the external address storing the voice whose source address is “EA1” and the port number “5004” of the UDP or TCP packet in the IP packet is formed. That is, the feature is that the media router 1021-1 assigns the external address “EA1” and the port number “5004” to the telephone having the telephone number “Tel-No-1”.

  Next, another disclosure example of another media router 1021-2 will be described with reference to FIG. The media router 1021-2 includes a telephone control unit 1081-2, a PBX control unit 1085-1, a connection control unit 1080-2, and routers 1086 and 1087. The IP packet transmitted from the terminal 1090 in the LAN 1093 reaches the network node device in the IP transfer network via the router 1087, the communication line 1089, the router 1086, and the communication line 1040-2. Similarly, an IP packet including the same image data transmitted from the moving image transmitter / receiver 1092 reaches the network node device in the IP transfer network via the router 1087, the communication line 1089, the router 1086, and the communication line 1040-2. . Transfer of IP packets in the reverse direction is also possible.

  In order to implement an IP full service using an IP network, (1) a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method using a mobile communication network and an IP network, and (2) a line connection control using a telephone number is performed above the TCP layer. Method, (3) Method of performing video conference communication using multicast function of IP network, (4) Method of configuring relay gateway device connecting IP network and PSTN, (5) Internal all or part of external address A method for setting in the address area of the packet, (6) a method for setting all or part of the external address in the internal frame, (7) a method for performing various functions of the network node device in the IP network, (8) a fixed telephone, Mobile phone, multimedia communication method using the same IP network, (9) secure ASP method, and (10) sending and receiving multicast data without distinction between mobile and fixed terminals , (11) a method for switching a radio base station during a call, the communication company does not exist a terminal Q communication connection connection control method for performing IP full service.

  The object of the present invention is to solve the above method and the problems derived from the above method. That is, (1) inter-terminal communication for performing telephone communication and voice image communication so that a mobile phone and a voice image device communicate with other telephones and voice image devices via the IP network and the mobile communication network. The purpose is to solve the connection control method. (2) After establishing a TCP communication path between the caller side call management server and the callee side telephone management server and then establishing a communication path for inter-terminal communication The purpose is to solve the inter-terminal communication connection control method by performing voice image communication between two voice image devices via the IP network. (3) For multicasting in the address management table in the network node device The method of performing a video conference by IP multicast by setting a communication record for the IP address, setting a multicast routing table in the router, and transmitting a voice moving image using the multicast address. (4) In order to perform telephone communication of telephone-IP network-PSTN-telephone, a relay gateway is installed in the IP network to connect the common-line signaling-based IP network to the PSTN. (5) In IP packet encapsulation, all or part of the external address is set in the address area of the internal packet by the method of setting in the external IP packet. An object is to solve a method of configuring an IP network, and (6) An object of the present invention is to solve a method of configuring an IP network by a method in which all or part of an external address is set in an address area of an internal frame. 7) Separate IP network into multiple internal IP networks using packet filter, priority control function, multicast recipient address translation function, port number The purpose of this method is to solve the method of constructing a secure IP network by implementing the above method, and to solve the method of separating the inside of the IP network into a plurality of internal IP networks. The purpose is to solve a method of performing fixed telephone communication and mobile telephone communication in the same IP network using a CIC management table based on the common line signaling system and including the UNI management function on the terminal side. ) The network node device selects the IP address, port number, and protocol type of the IP packet transmitted / received between the ASP operation server and the user program, and eliminates the undesignated IP packet, thereby enabling safe ASP. The purpose is to provide an IP network, and (10) IP packet switching service (intranet, extranet) and fixed telephone service and mobile telephone service have the same principle. In order to provide a multicast data method without distinction between a mobile terminal and a fixed terminal, and (11) a mobile telephone is changed to a mobile communication network composed of an IP network. The purpose is to solve the method of registering and registering and changing the location of the telephone.

  The present invention relates to a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method using an IP network, and the object of the present invention is that the mobile telephone communicates with the telephone through the mobile communication network and the IP network. Line connection control is performed using a common line signal system, and telephone communication is performed by establishing a communication path by sending and receiving a line connection control message in which the No. 7 common line signal system is applied to the IP network. Is achieved.

  In addition, the object of the present invention is that the voice image apparatus 1 performs voice image communication with the voice image apparatus 2 via the mobile communication network and the IP network, and therefore the line connection control by No. 7 common line signal system is used in the mobile communication network. In the IP network, a communication path is established by a line connection control message in which the No. 7 common line signal system is applied to the IP network, and then a voice image communication path is established between the voice image apparatuses 1 and 2. The voice image communication is performed between the voice image apparatuses 1 and 2, and when the voice image communication ends, the voice image apparatuses 1 and 2 perform control for closing the voice image communication path. The procedure is executed, and the voice image devices 1 and 2 release a communication line by a line connection control message or establish a TCP communication path between the caller side telephone management server and the callee side telephone management server. , Line connection After sending and receiving messages IAM, ACM, CPG, and ANM and establishing a communication path for communication between terminals, voice and data are transmitted and received between the two terminals, and the calling side telephone management server and the called side telephone management server This is achieved by sending and receiving line connection control messages REL and RLC between the two to release the communication path and release the TCP communication path.

  Furthermore, after establishing a TCP communication path between the calling side telephone management server and the called side telephone management server, a communication path for terminal-to-terminal communication is established by sending and receiving line connection control messages IAM, ACM, CPG, and ANM. After that, the TCP communication path is released, voice and data are transmitted and received between the two terminals, and when one of the terminals finishes the transmission and reception of the voice and data, the calling side telephone management server and the called side telephone management server This is achieved by establishing the TCP communication path between the terminals and then transmitting and receiving line connection control messages REL and RLC to release the communication path for the terminal-to-terminal communication and release the TCP communication path.

  The present invention relates to a video conference communication method using an IP network, and the above object of the present invention is to set an address management table in a network node device, set a routing table for multicast IP packet transfer in a router, and transmit The party 1 transmits voice and moving images using the multicast address “M1”, and one or more recipients receive the voice and moving images using the multicast address “M1”. The sender 2 transmits the multicast address “M1”. M2 ”is used to transmit voice and moving images, and one or more recipients are configured to receive the voice and moving images using the multicast address“ M2 ”. This is achieved by being encapsulated and transferred through the IP network and using the multicast transmission / reception function.

  The present invention also relates to a configuration of a gateway in an IP network, and the above object of the present invention is to provide a relay gateway as a relay control unit in order to perform communication between telephones via a telephone 1-IP network-PSTN-telephone 2. An NNI interface unit based on a common line signal system connected to a PSTN or a mobile communication network in the relay control unit, and a common line signal system connected to a PSTN or a mobile communication network in the voice control unit. This is achieved by adding a UNI interface unit based on it.

  The present invention also relates to an IP network, and the above object of the present invention is to convert an external IP packet into an internal packet at an ingress network node device and transfer the internal packet to the internal network. The external IP packet is restored, and all or part of the external address set in the external IP packet is based on the management of the record of the address management table in the ingress network node device. This is achieved by being set in the address area of the internal packet.

  The present invention also relates to an IP network, and the object of the present invention is to provide an external address set in an external IP packet based on management of records in an address management table in a network node device on the incoming side of the external IP packet. Is achieved by setting all or part of the address in the address area of the internal frame.

  The present invention also relates to a method for implementing various functions of a network node device in an IP network. The object of the present invention is to configure the network node device to include at least one of a protocol filter function and a port filter function, The protocol filter function controls whether to convert the external IP packet into an internal packet according to the protocol in the input external IP packet as a function at the time of outgoing. As an internal function, an internal IP packet is received from the inside of the IP network, and an external packet is transmitted from the internal IP packet according to the port number of the external IP packet included in the payload portion in the internal IP packet to be input. The above object is achieved by controlling whether or not the data is restored and sent to an external communication line.

  The packet filter function of the network node apparatus includes a protocol filter that uses a protocol type inside an IP packet and a port filter function that uses a port number inside a TCP or UDP segment inside an IP packet. The port filter also passes the packet according to the port passage condition of the external IP packet entering the network node device or suppresses the packet. The network node device further has a function (multicast NAT function) for converting the destination multicast IP address to another IP address using the multicast control table. By using the port filter that can be implemented in the communication record of the device table in the network node device, the IP network can be separated into a plurality of internal networks. The network node device includes a device control table, and the control table includes a filtering control table, a packet priority control table, a multicast control table, and a signature control table. The device control table is achieved by including a function of an address management table according to the other technique.

  The present invention also relates to an IP network. The object of the present invention is to provide six communication cases using the IP network, that is, communication between a fixed telephone and a fixed telephone as the communication case 1, and a mobile telephone as the communication case 2. Communication between mobile phone and mobile phone as communication case 3, communication between fixed phone and mobile phone as communication case 4, multi-line based on common line signal system as communication case 5 The above object is achieved by solving the communication between the media terminals and the communication between the multimedia terminals that sets the communication record as the communication case 6.

  The communication procedure between the media router and the telephone management server and the communication procedure between the media router and the telephone management server are UNI, and the communication procedure between the telephone management server and the telephone management server is a common line signal system. NNI based. The IP network includes two or more network node devices. An external packet transmitted from the media router 1 or the wireless base station 1 becomes an internal packet in the network node device on the transmission side, and the internal packet is transferred inside the communication network. The internal packet is restored to the external packet in the network node device on the called side, and sent to the media router 2 or the radio base station 2.

  In communication case 1 to communication case 4, communication is performed by connecting the terminal 1, the media router 1 or the radio base station 1, the telephone management server 1, the telephone management server 2, the media router 2, the radio base station 2, and the terminal 2 through a communication line. Therefore, the communication procedure between the media router or the radio base station and the telephone management server is UNI for the media router or the radio base station, and the communication procedure between the telephone management server and the telephone management server is a common line signal system. And the inter-terminal communication connection control method is performed by the method described above. The radio base station includes an IP communication line interface unit, a radio interface unit, and a radio transmission / reception unit, and is capable of telephone communication with any of an analog mobile phone, a digital mobile phone, and an IP mobile, and uses a channel-IP address correspondence table. The above object is achieved in such a way that the IP address used by the mobile telephone can be managed.

  In communication case 5, communication is performed to connect multimedia terminal 1, media router 1 or radio base station 1, telephone management server 1, telephone management server 2, media router 2 or radio base station 2, and multimedia terminal 2 through a communication line. Therefore, as described above, the communication object between the telephone management server and the telephone management server is achieved by performing NNI based on the common line signal system. In the communication case 6, the IP terminal 1, the media router 1 or the radio base station 1, the telephone management server 1, the telephone management server 2, the media router 2 or the radio base station 2, and the IP terminal 2 having the IP packet transmission / reception function are connected from the communication line. As described above, the communication procedure between the telephone management server and the telephone management server does not adopt the common line signal system, and further, based on the request of the IP terminal 1, the IP terminal 1 and the IP terminal The above object is achieved by setting a communication record in the device control table for use in communication with 2 and deleting the communication record after the end of communication.

  The present invention also relates to an IP network. The object of the present invention is to register a mobile telephone in a mobile communication network composed of an IP network for carrying out mobile telephone communication. -Telephone management server 1-Telephone management server 2-Radio base station 2-Geographical location where the mobile phone 1 communicates with another radio base station 3 while continuing telephone communication via the communication line of the mobile phone 2 , That is, the telephone communication can be continued through the communication line of the mobile telephone 1 -the radio base station 3 -the telephone management server 1 -the telephone management server 2 -the radio base station 2 -the mobile telephone 2 . Further, the mobile telephone 1 is connected to the mobile telephone 1 while continuing the telephone communication via the communication line of the mobile telephone 1 -the radio base station 1 -the telephone management server 1 -the telephone management server 2 -the radio base station 2 -the mobile telephone 2. Moves to another radio base station 4 managed by the telephone management server 4, that is, a communication line consisting of a mobile telephone 1 -a radio base station 4 -a telephone management server 4 -a telephone management server 2 -a radio base station 2 -a mobile telephone 2 This is achieved by solving a method of continuing telephone communication via.

  The present invention also relates to an ASP service realized via an IP network. The object of the present invention is to select an IP address, a port number, and a protocol type of an IP packet transmitted / received between an ASP server and a user program by a network node device. By excluding non-designated IP packets, an IP packet including an allowed IP address, port number or protocol type passes through the network node device, and the unacceptable IP packet is excluded at the network node device. The above object can be achieved by implementing an IP network that can implement a secure ASP service.

  The present invention also relates to an IP network, and the object of the present invention is to transmit multicast data to almost all network node devices in the IP network so that a plurality of mobile terminals can receive the multicast data. This is achieved when the mobile terminal performs a communication procedure for terminal authentication with the radio base station, and the mobile terminal that has received permission receives the multicast data.

  According to the present invention, a terminal for performing telephone communication or voice image communication so that a mobile telephone or a voice image device communicates with another telephone or voice image device via an IP network and a mobile communication network. After realizing the inter-communication communication control method, establishing a TCP communication path between the calling-side talk management server and the receiving-side telephone management server, and then establishing a communication path for terminal-to-terminal communication, two audio images By implementing voice image communication between devices via the IP network, an inter-terminal communication connection control method is realized, a multicast communication record is set in the address management table in the network node device, and in the router A method for performing a TV conference by IP multicast by setting a multicast routing table and transmitting a voice moving image using a multicast address is realized, and a telephone-IP network In order to perform telephone communication, PSTN-telephone, a relay gateway is installed in the IP network to realize a gateway configuration method for connecting the common line signaling-based IP network and the PSTN. In IP packet encapsulation, it is realized to solve a method of configuring an IP network by setting all or part of an external address in the address area of the internal packet by a method of setting in an external IP packet, To solve the method of configuring the IP network by setting all or part of the address in the address area of the internal frame, using the packet filter, priority control function, multicast recipient address translation function, port number, Solving a method for constructing a secure IP network by implementing a method for separating an IP network into a plurality of internal IP networks Realizing this, the inside of the IP network is separated into a plurality of internal IP networks, and the fixed line communication and movement are performed using the CIC management table based on the common line signal system and including the UNI management function on the terminal side. A method for implementing telephone communication in the same IP network is realized, and the network node device selects an IP address, a port number, and a protocol type of an IP packet transmitted / received between the ASP server and the user program, and is not designated. By eliminating IP packets, an IP network that can implement secure ASP is realized, and IP packet switching services (intranet, extranet), fixed telephone service, and mobile telephone service are provided without distinction by the IP network based on the same principle. In addition, the multicast data method is realized without distinction between the mobile terminal and the fixed terminal, and the mobile telephone Is registered in a mobile communication network consisting of an IP network, and a method of registering and changing the location of a telephone can be realized.

  The present invention relates to an IP encapsulation technique disclosed in a prior patent, a method for dynamically setting an address management table, a method for obtaining an IP address using a telephone number as a domain name, and a simple capsule disclosed in a prior application. New terminal-to-terminal communication control system for performing full IP service by combining the common technique of the common line signaling disclosed in the prior application to the IP network and the multicast technique disclosed in the prior application Is realized. Further, a line connection control message “IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLC” or the like in which the No. 7 common line signaling method is applied to IP is transmitted or received between the mobile communication network and the IP network. After establishing a TCP communication path between the side telephone management server and the destination telephone management server, a line connection control message applied to the IP network is transmitted and received to establish a communication path for terminal-to-terminal communication, or multicast The function is applied to the TV conference, the multicast function is applied to the communication between the terminals connecting the mobile communication and the IP network, or the external address set in the external IP packet is set in the address area of the internal packet and the internal The aforementioned problem is solved by forming a packet.

Japanese Patent Application No. 11-128956 separates the integrated IP communication network into a plurality of IP networks, that is, an IP data network, an IP telephone network, an IP voice image network, a best effort network, and an IP data multicast network. It is disclosed that a network node device inside a network can be connected to any of IP networks. Here, a technique for connecting to one of the IP networks in correspondence with a record for managing encapsulation and decapsulation inside the network node device, that is, an address registered in an address management record for managing encapsulation and decapsulation The plurality of IP network separations are realized by utilizing the difference of the above. However, a method for separating a plurality of IP networks in a case where there is no difference in addresses registered in the record is not disclosed.

1. First embodiment of inter-terminal communication connection control using a mobile communication network and an IP network:
In FIG. 1, 100 is an IP network operated and managed by a communication company X, 101 is a mobile communication network operated and managed by a communication company Y, 102 is a public switched telephone network (PSTN), 103 is a termination gateway, 104 is a termination control unit, 105 and 105-1 are network node devices, 106 is a relay gateway, 107 is a relay control unit, 108 is a voice control unit, 113 is a network node device, and the network node device 113 encapsulates or reverses voice IP packets that pass through. Encapsulate. 110 and 111 are routers, 112 and 115 are control communication lines, 114 and 114-1 are voice communication lines, 116 are media routers, 117 are communication lines, 120 and 121 are relay exchanges, 122 is a terminal switch, 123 is service information Node, 124 is a signal terminal station (SEP), 125 is a signal relay station (STP), 126 is a speech path part of the switch 122, 127 is a speech path part of the relay switch 120, 128-1 to 128-3 are relay devices, 129-1 to 129-3 are communication lines, 130 is a radio base station of the mobile communication network 101, 131, 132 and 170 are No. 7 common line signal control communication lines, 133, 134 and 171 are voice communication lines, Reference numeral 138 denotes a wireless communication line. 140 is a telephone connected to the telephone network 102, 141 is a telephone, and 142 is a telephone connected to the media router 116 via the communication line 137. A set of the control communication line 131 and the voice communication line 133 is an NNI (network / network interface) of a switching network, and a set of the control communication line 132 and the voice communication line 134 is also an NNI. 120 to 123 are connected by a communication line via any one of the relay devices 128-1 to 128-3 and can exchange information with each other. The telephone 141 has a function of communicating with a base station via a wireless communication line, and can also be called a mobile telephone. The telephones 140 and 142 can be called fixed telephones.

The IP network 100 and the public switched telephone network 102 can communicate with each other via an NNI line comprising a set of a control communication line 170 and a voice communication line 171. The specific procedure of communication is the prior application (fourteenth embodiment). Etc.).
<< Connection Phase >>
This is an example of telephone communication from the telephone set 141 to the telephone set 142. 2, 100-1 represents the range of the IP network 100, and 101-1 represents the range of the mobile communication network 101. Within the range 100-1, a series of line control messages (IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLC, etc.) stored in IP packets conforming to at least the common line signal system are transmitted and received. A series of line control messages (IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLC, etc.) determined by at least the common line signal system are transmitted and received. When a connection request is transmitted from the telephone set 141 via the wireless communication line 138, a wireless channel connection request signal is transmitted to the wireless base station 130 (step E01), and the wireless base station 130 confirms reception to the base station (step S01). E02).

  Next, call setting request information including the telephone number “TN1” of the telephone set 141 as the transmission source and the telephone number “TN2” of the telephone set 142 as the destination is transmitted from the telephone set 141 to the radio base station 130 (step E03). The base station 130 transmits the call setting request information to the signal terminal station 124 in the terminal switch 122 via the communication line 135 (step E04). The signal terminal 124 receives the call setting request information, examines the content of the call setting request information, and sends a call information inquiry message including the telephone number “TN2” of the received telephone 142 to the service information node 123 (step E05). ). Then, the service information node 123 returns the signal station code “PC125” of the signal relay station 125 to the signal terminal station 124 as information for connecting the telephone number “TN2” (step E06). Call setting acceptance information is transmitted from the signal terminal station 124 to the radio base station 130 (step E07), and the radio base station 130 transmits call setting acceptance information to the telephone set 141 (step E08).

  Next, terminal authentication information formed from the unique information of the telephone set 141 is transmitted from the telephone set 141 to the signal terminal station 124 in the terminal exchange 122 (step E11) via the radio base station 130 (step E10). The signal terminal station 124 examines the received terminal authentication information and notifies the mobile radio apparatus of the communication channel setting information via the radio base station 130 (steps E12 and E13). An initial address message (IAM) determined by the above is formed and sent to the communication line 129-1. Then, the initial address message reaches the signal relay station 125 via the communication line 129-1, the relay device 128-1, and the communication line 129-2 (step E14). When the signal relay station 125 sends the received initial address message to the control communication line 131 (step E15), the initial address message determined by the common line signaling system is transferred to the inside of the IP network 100 by the relay control unit 107 ( 1 and 3). The IAM packet 151 is transmitted to the communication line 112 and reaches the termination control unit 104 in the termination gateway 103 via the router 110 and the communication line 115 (step E16).

  The IAM packet 151 includes a source IP address “I107”, a destination IP address “I104”, a line number “ClC-1”, a message “IAM”, and parameters. The parameters include telephone numbers “TN1” and “TN2”. Yes. The source IP address “I107” is an IP address assigned to the relay control unit 107, and the destination IP address “I104” is an IP address assigned to the termination control unit 104. The IAM packet 151 includes an IP packet header 151-1 and a UDP segment 151-2 in its payload portion. The source port number in the UDP header 151-3 is used to identify the telephone management server in the relay control unit 107, and the destination port number in the UDP header 151-3 identifies the telephone management server in the termination control unit 104. Used to do.

  The termination control unit 104 forms and transmits an IP packet notifying the telephone call request to the media router 116 based on the received call connection control IP packet 151 (step E17), and the media router 116 receives the IP packet. . The media router 116 notifies the telephone call setup request to the telephone set 142 (step E20), and the media router 116 returns an IP packet notifying the reception at step E17 to the termination control unit 104 (step E21). The termination control unit 104 forms an ACM packet 152 (FIGS. 1 and 4) including an address completion message in the payload portion of the IP packet based on the IP packet that informs the reception, and returns it to the relay control unit 107 (step E22). The ACM packet 152 is converted into a common line signaling ACM message handled by the mobile communication network 101 in the relay control unit 107, transferred through the control line 131, and reaches the relay control unit 125 (step E23). The relay control unit 124 is reached via the line 129-2, the relay device 128-1, and the communication line 129-1 (step E24). The ANM packet 152 includes an IP packet header 152-1 and a UDP segment 152-2 in its payload portion. The source port number in the UDP header 152-3 is used to identify the telephone management server in the termination control unit 104, and the destination port number in the UDP header 152-3 identifies the telephone management server in the relay control unit 107. Used to do.

  When the telephone 142 informs the media router 116 of the ringing notification (step E30), the notification is sent to the termination control unit 104 via the media router 116 and the communication line 117 (step E31). The termination control unit 104 forms a CPG packet 153 (FIG. 5) including a call progress message informing the incoming call of the telephone in the payload portion of the IP packet based on the IP packet informing the incoming call of the telephone, and sends it to the relay control unit 107. In step E32, the relay control unit 107 converts the CPG packet 153 into a common line signaling CPG message handled by the mobile communication network 101, and reaches the relay control unit 125 via the control line 131 (step E33). ). The CPG packet 153 includes an IP packet header 153-1 and a UDP segment 153-2 in its payload portion.

  Further, the signal reaches the relay control unit 124 via the communication line 129-2, the relay device 128-1, and the communication line 129-1 (step E34), and a signal notifying that the telephone is ringing is notified to the radio base station 130 ( In step E35, a telephone ringing tone is notified to the telephone set 141 (step E36). The ANM packet 154 includes an IP packet header 154-1 and a UDP segment 154-2 in its payload portion.

  When the telephone set 142 responds, the response notification reaches the media router 116 and the termination control unit 104 (steps E40 and E41). The termination control unit 104 receives a call in the payload portion of the IP packet based on the IP packet that informs the response. An ANM packet 154 (FIG. 6) including a response message notifying that the call is in progress is formed and sent back to the relay control unit 107 (step E42). It is converted into a system ANM message, and a response is notified to the telephone set 141 via the relay control unit 125, the relay router 128-1, the relay control unit 124, and the radio base station 130, and a call becomes possible (steps E43 to E46).

  Voice IP packets are transmitted and received between the telephone set 141 and the telephone set 142 to perform voice communication (step E48). The voice sent from the telephone set 141 is a radio communication line 138, a radio base station 130, a communication line 135, a communication path unit 126, a communication line 129-3, relay devices 128-2 and 128-3, a communication path unit 127, voice. It reaches the telephone set 142 via the network node device 105, the communication line 117, and the media router 116 via the communication line 133, the voice control unit 108, the network node device 113, the router 111, and the communication line 114. The voice transmitted from the telephone set 142 is transferred in the reverse direction to the above and reaches the telephone set 141. It is disclosed in Example 13 (FIG. 227, etc.) of the prior application that the voice control unit 108 and the network node device 105 perform the IP encapsulation and decapsulation of the digitized voice data. 155 in FIG. 7 shows an example of an IP packet storing digitized voice data.

  When the telephone set 141 issues a release request (step E50), telephone call release and release completion procedures (steps E51 to E56, steps E60 to E66) in a series of telephone line connection control according to the No. 7 common line signaling system are performed. Done. Then, a radio channel disconnection signal is transmitted from the exchange 122 and notified to the radio base station 130 (step E70), and is notified to the telephone set 141 via the radio base station 130 (step E71). The telephone set 141 returns a disconnection confirmation signal to the radio base station 130, and the disconnection signal passes through the telephone set 141 (step E72) and reaches the exchange 122 (step E73).

  Through the series of steps E01 to E73, telephone communication can be performed between the telephones 141 and 142. In step E54, a REL packet 156 (FIG. 8) including a release message informing the release of telephone communication (end of voice communication) is formed and transferred in the payload portion of the IP packet, and in step E62, the IP packet An RLC packet 157 (FIG. 9) including a release completion message informing the completion of release of telephone communication (confirmation for release) is formed and transferred in the payload portion of. The REL packet 156 includes an IP packet header 156-1 and a UDP segment 156-2 in its payload portion. The RLC packet 157 includes an IP packet header 157-1 and a UDP segment 157-2 in its payload portion. The internal IP packet transmitted / received between the termination control unit 104 and the relay control unit 107 is designated by “UDP” as a prototype in the IP packet header, and is set in the payload of the internal IP packet. The line connection control messages as the NNI interface are stored.

Note that the communication step (UNI interface) between the radio base station 130 and the terminal relay station 124 can be changed to a procedure other than that described above, for example, steps E07 and E11 can be changed to other steps or omitted.
<< Explanation about port number >>
“EA8”, “5006”, and “Info-1” included in the parameter area of the IAM packet 151 in FIG. 3 will be described. “EA8” is an IP address assigned to the voice communication port in the voice control unit 108, “5006” is a port number in the UDP packet holding the digital voice transmitted from the voice control unit 108, and “Info-1” "Is ancillary information sent from the relay control unit 107 to the media router 116 side, for example, a voice compression format, and is meaningful only for a telephone call having a telephone call identifier" CIC-1 ". “EA2”, “5008”, and “Info-2” included in the parameter area of the CPG packet 153 in FIG. 5 will be described. “EA2” is the IP address assigned to the voice communication port inside the termination control unit 104, “5008” is the port number in the UDP packet holding the digital voice transmitted from the termination control unit 104, and “Info-2” "Is ancillary information transmitted from the termination control unit 104 to the relay control unit 107, and is meaningful only for a telephone call having the telephone call identifier" CIC-1 ". “EA2”, “5008”, and “Info-3” included in the parameter area of the ANM packet 154 in FIG. 6 are the same as described above, and “Info-3” is transmitted from the termination control unit 104 to the relay control unit 107 side. It is incidental information.

Next, in the case where the network node device 105 and the voice control unit 108 are changed to other network node devices or voice control units that do not have the IP encapsulation function, the digitized voice is in the form of “158” in FIG. The IP header for IP encapsulation is not attached.
<< Call from IP network side telephone to mobile network side telephone >>
With reference to FIG. 11, telephone communication from the telephone set 142 connected to the IP network 100 side to the telephone set 141 connected to the mobile communication network 101 side will be described.

  First, a connection request is sent from the telephone 142 (step F01), and the media router confirms acceptance (step F02). Call setting request information including “TN1” is transmitted to the termination control unit 104 (step F04). Upon receiving the call setting request information, the termination control unit 104 forms an initial address message (IAM) transferred inside the IP network 100 and sends it to the control communication line 115 (step F05). The initial address message is relay-controlled. The relay control unit 107 converts the initial address message (IAM) into an initial address message (IAM) in the form of a common line signal system and sends it to the control communication line 131 (step F06). When the signal relay station 125 extracts a transmission information inquiry message including the telephone number “TN1” of the telephone 141 from the received initial address message (IAM) and sends it to the service information node 123 (step F07), the service information node 123 The signal station code “PC124” of the signal terminal station 124 is returned as information for connecting the telephone number “TN1” (step F08). When the signal relay station 125 resets the destination address of the initial address message (IAM) having received the signal station code “PC124” and sends it to the communication line 129-2, the reset initial address message is sent to the communication line 129-2. Then, the signal reaches the signal terminal station 124 via the relay device 128-1 and the communication line 129-1 (step F10).

  The signaling terminal station 124 sends a telephone call setting request to the base station 130 based on the received initial address message (IAM) (step F11), and the base station 130 calls the telephone set 141 via the wireless communication path 138. (Step F12). The telephone set 141 reports the state (noise, voice quality, etc.) of the wireless communication path 138 to the wireless base station 130 (step F13), and then, for example, information indicating terminal validity including password transmission or the like is transmitted to the wireless base station 130. To the signal terminal station 124 (step F15, step F16). The signal terminal station 124 notifies the telephone set 141 of the communication channel setting instruction via the radio base station 130 (step F17, step F18). The signal terminal 124 then notifies the telephone call setup request to the telephone set 141 via the radio base station 130 (step F20, step F21), and the common line signal notifying that the telephone call setup request can be received based on the initial address message. A system address completion message (ACM) is formed and transmitted to the signal relay unit 125 (step F22). The address completion message (ACM) reaches the relay control unit 107 via the control line 131 (step F23), and the address completion message (ACM) is converted into an ACM packet handled in the IP network by the relay control unit 107. The terminal 110 reaches the termination control unit 104 via the router 110 (step F24), and the telephone call setting request information reaches the media router 116 via the communication line 117 (step F25).

  When the telephone set 141 notifies the calling state, the calling notification reaches the signal terminal station 124 via the base station 130 (step F30) (step F31). The signal termination station 124 forms and sends a call message (CPG) (step F32), and the call message (CPG) reaches the signal relay station 125, the control communication line 131, and the relay control unit 107 (step F33, step F34). ). The relay control unit 107 notifies the telephone call notification to the telephone set 142 via the media router 116 (step F35, step F36).

  When the telephone set 141 responds, the response notification reaches the signal terminal station 124 (step F41) via the base station 130 (step F40). The signal termination station 124 sends a confirmation notification to the telephone set 141 via the radio base station 130 (steps F42 and F43), and the signal termination station 124 forms and sends a response message (ACM) (step F44). The response message (ACM) reaches the relay control unit 107 via the signal relay station 125 and the control communication line 131 (steps F45 and F46). The relay control unit 107 notifies the response notification to the telephone set 142 via the media router 116, so that a call can be made (steps F47 and F48).

  Through the above procedure, voice IP packets are transmitted and received between the telephone set 141 and the telephone set 142 to perform voice communication (step F50). When the telephone 142 issues a release request (step F51), the same procedure (steps F52 to F70) for releasing and releasing the telephone call is performed, and the telephone communication is terminated. Here, Steps F54 to F56 are release request messages REL, and Steps F61 to F63 are release completion messages RLC.

Note that the communication step between the telephone set 141 and the terminal relay station 124 can be changed to a procedure other than that described above, for example, steps F13 to F18 can be changed to other steps or omitted. Introducing other messages in the No. 7 common line signaling system to this embodiment, for example, implementing a SUS message for temporarily interrupting line connection control and a RES message for resuming interruption Is also possible.
<< Setting and release of address management table in network node device >>
As described above, inside the IP network, the external IP packet is IP-encapsulated into an internal IP packet. For this purpose, a record in the address management table inside the network node device is used. Therefore, after establishing the series of call connection control described in FIG. 11, that is, after sending / receiving the ANM message, a record in the address management table in the network node apparatus is set, and after releasing a series of calls, ie after sending / receiving the RLC message. Then, the record of the address management table in the network node device is deleted. However, setting and releasing records for encapsulation are disclosed in prior patents and prior applications.

The IP network 100 uses the IP encapsulation and reverse encapsulation functions used in the prior patent, and the functions of the IP network can be summarized as follows. The IP network 100 includes two or more network node devices. When an external IP packet is input from a logical terminal at the end of the communication line 117, the external IP packet becomes an internal packet based on the management of the address management table in the network node device 105. The internal packet is transferred inside the IP network and reaches the network node device 113, and the internal packet is restored as an external IP packet based on the management of the address management table in the network node device 113.
<< Variation: Voice and image communication via IP network and mobile communication network >>
With reference to FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, voice image communication from the voice image device 152 connected to the IP network 145 side to the voice image device 160 connected to the mobile communication network 146 side will be described. Note that the audio image devices 152 and 160 are a terminal device and a telephone having a function of transmitting and receiving audio and still images, a terminal device and a telephone having a function of transmitting and receiving audio and moving images, a portable telephone, a TV broadcast transmitter, It can be a TV receiver.

  A connection request is sent from the audio image device 152 (step G01), and the media router 153 confirms reception (step G02). Subsequently, the media router 153 transmits call setting request information including the telephone number “TN2” of the voice image device 152 serving as the transmission source and the telephone number “TN1” of the voice image device 160 serving as the destination to the termination control unit 154 (step S1). G04). When the termination control unit 154 receives the call setting request information, the termination control unit 154 forms an initial address message (IAM) and sends it to the inside of the IP network 145 (step G05). The initial address message reaches the relay control unit 155, and the relay control unit 155 converts the initial address message into a common line signaling initial address message (IAM) used in the mobile communication network 146 and sends it to the control communication line 164 (step G06). When the signal relay station 156 extracts a transmission information inquiry message including the telephone number TN1 of the voice image device 160 from the received initial address message (IAM) and sends it to the service information node 157 (step G07), the service information node 157 As the information for connecting the telephone number TN1, the signal station code “PC158” of the signal terminal station 158 is returned (step G08). When the signal relay station 156 resets the signal address code “PC158” as the destination address of the received initial address message (IAM) and sends it to the inside of the mobile network 146, the reset initial address message is sent to the signal terminal station 158. Reach (step G10). The signal terminal station 158 sends a telephone call setting request to the base station 159 based on the received initial address message (step G11), and the base station 159 sends the audio image device 160 to the audio image device 160 via the wireless communication path 163. The communication call from 152 is notified (step G12). The audio image device 160 reports the state of the wireless communication path 163 to the wireless base station 159 (step G13), and subsequently transmits information indicating terminal validity including, for example, password transmission via the wireless base station 159. The terminal station 158 is notified (step G15, step G16). The signal terminal station 158 notifies the audio image device 160 of the communication channel setting instruction via the radio base station 159 (step G17, step G18). The signal terminal station 158 then notifies the voice image device 160 of a telephone call setting request via the radio base station 159 (step G20, step G21), and informs that reception of the telephone call setting request based on the initial address message is possible. A line signal type address completion message (ACM) is formed and transmitted to the signal relay unit 156 (step G22). The address completion message (ACM) reaches the relay control unit 155 via the control line 164 (step G23), and the address completion message (ACM) is converted into an ACM packet handled in the IP network by the relay control unit 155. Then, the IP network 145 is transferred to reach the termination control unit 154 (step G24), and the telephone call setting request information reaches the media router 153 (step G25).

  When the voice image apparatus 160 notifies that the calling is in progress, the calling notification reaches the signal terminal station 158 via the base station 159 (step G30) (step G31). The signal terminal station 158 forms and sends a call message (CPG) (step G32), and the call message (CPG) reaches the signal relay station 156, the control communication line 164, and the relay control units 155 and 154 (step G33, Step G34). The relay control unit 155 notifies the voice image device 152 of a telephone call notification via the media router 153 (step G35, step G36).

  When the voice image device 160 responds, the response notification reaches the signal terminal station 158 via the base station 159 (step G40) (step G41). The signal terminal station 158 sends a confirmation notice to the audio image device 160 via the radio base station 159 (steps G42 and G43), and the signal terminal station 158 forms a response message (ACM) and sends it (step S42). G44), the response message (ACM) reaches the relay control units 155 and 154 via the signal relay station 156 and the control communication line 164 (step G45, step G46). The relay control unit 155 notifies the response notification to the audio image device 152 via the media router 153, thereby enabling audio image communication (steps G47, G48, and G49).

  Through the above procedure, a communication path connecting the IP network and the mobile communication network is established between the audio image device 152 and the audio image device 160. Next, the audio image device 152 and the audio image device 160 execute a control procedure for audio image communication such as establishment of an audio image communication logical channel, selection of a communication mode, designation of flow control, and exchange of terminal capability information (step). G50-1). As this control procedure, for example, the ITU-T recommendation / multimedia communication system H.264 is used. 245 control procedures can be employed. Next, an IP packet storing multimedia data such as voice and images is transmitted and received between the voice image device 152 and the voice image device 160, and voice image communication is performed (step G50-2). The multimedia data passes through the voice communication line 165 and the voice control unit 155-1 of the mobile communication network. When the audio image communication ends, the audio image device 152 and the audio image device 160 execute a control procedure for closing the established audio image communication path (step G50-3).

  Next, when the voice image device 152 issues a release request (step G51), the above-described procedures for releasing and releasing the telephone call are performed (steps G51 to G70), and the IP communication network set for voice image communication is performed. And the communication path connecting the mobile communication network is released. At this time, one of the audio image devices 152 or 154 issues a release request, and a release request message REL and a release completion message RLC are transmitted and received through the mobile communication network and the IP network, and communication between the two audio image devices is released. The

Note that the communication step between the audio image device 160 and the terminal relay station 158 can be changed to a procedure other than the above, for example, steps G13 to G18 can be changed to other steps or omitted. In the above description, the audio image device 152 connected to the IP network 145 issues a request for terminal-to-terminal connection to the audio image device 160 connected to the mobile communication network 146. It is disclosed by a similar example in the first half of this embodiment that an end-to-end connection request to 152 can be issued. A function of transmitting and receiving audio moving images can be given to the audio image device.
<< Summary >>
The mobile telephone 141 passes through the wireless communication path 138 and the base station 130, the terminal switch 122 in the mobile communication network, the communication lines 129-1 to 129-2 in the mobile communication network, the relay switch 120 in the mobile communication network, the mobile communication A combination of NNI communication lines 131 and 133 between the network and the IP network, a relay gateway 106 of the IP network, internal communication lines 112 and 115, 114 of the IP network, a termination gateway 103 of the IP network, a media router 116, a communication line 137 In order to perform telephone communication with the fixed telephone 142, the inside of the mobile communication network 101 performs line connection control by the No. 7 common line signal system, and the inside of the IP network applies the No. 7 common line signal system to the IP network. The communication line is established by the line connection control and telephone communication is performed.

  The IP network includes two or more network node devices. An external IP packet is input from a logical terminal at the end of a communication line. Thus, the internal packet is transferred inside the IP network and reaches the incoming network node device, and the internal packet is restored as an external IP packet based on the management of the address management table in the incoming network node device.

  In addition, since the voice image device 1 performs voice image communication with the voice image device 2 via the mobile communication network, the NNI communication line, and the IP network, the mobile communication network performs line connection control by No. 7 common line signal system, The IP network establishes a communication path by line connection control in which the No. 7 common line signal system is applied to the IP network, and then opens a voice image communication path (media communication path) between the two audio image devices. Perform a control procedure (for example, a control procedure of ITU-T or H.245), and send and receive IP packets storing voice and images between the voice image device 152 and the voice image device 160 to perform voice image communication. You can also. When the audio image communication is completed, the audio image device 152 and the audio image device 160 execute a control procedure for closing the established audio image communication channel (media communication channel). Next, when the voice image device 152 or 154 issues a request to release the communication path by the line connection control message, the mobile communication network is based on the line connection control protocol based on the common line signal system, and the IP network uses the common line signal system as IP. Based on the line connection control protocol applied to the network, a release request message REL and a release completion message RLC are transmitted and received through the mobile communication network and the IP network, and communication between the two audio image apparatuses is released.

A communication channel is established between the audio image device 1 and the audio image device 2 using a telephone number, and after performing audio image communication, the audio image communication channel is released. The image can be a still image or a moving image. In this embodiment, the designation of the prototype in the header of the internal IP packet is UDP, and the line connection control message (IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLC) is the payload of the IP packet (IPv4) defined in RFC791. This is an embodiment in which a UDP segment is set in As another method, “CC” representing circuit connection control is defined as a new prototype, and circuit connection control messages are stored in the payload portion of the internal IP packet. As another method, the protocol type is “ICMP”. A method of specifying and storing in the ICMP message area set in the payload portion in the internal IP packet is also possible. Further, a TCP segment can be used instead of the UDP segment, which is described in another embodiment. It can also be implemented as an IP packet (IPv6) defined in RFC1883.

2. A line connection control protocol using a telephone number is performed above the TCP layer Second embodiment:
The present embodiment is a method of performing the line connection control protocol in the upper layer of the TCP layer, that is, a method of executing the line connection control protocol after setting the TCP communication path. FIG. 14 shows the communication function layer. From the lower layer to the upper layer, the physical layer (communication layer 1), the data link layer (communication layer 2), the IP layer (communication layer 3 or network layer), the TCP / UDP layer ( Communication communication layer or transport layer), and a line connection control protocol conforming to the common line signal system is placed above communication 1 to communication 4 layers. Furthermore, SIP, H322 signaling protocol, H245 protocol, etc. are set as communication protocols for inter-terminal communication connection control described in the prior application etc. above the line connection control protocol. The line connection control protocol conforming to the common line signal system indicates a call control message such as IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLC shown in the first embodiment of the prior application.

  This will be described with reference to FIG. 222-1 is an IP transfer network, 222-2 and 222-3 are LANs, 223-1 and 223-2 are termination gateways, 225 and 230 are terminals, 226 and 229 are media routers, and 227 and 228 are telephone management servers. is there. The network node devices 231 and 232 include the functions of IP encapsulation and decapsulation used in the prior patent. The IP 222-1 network includes two or more network node devices, and an external IP packet is input from the logical terminal at the end of the communication line. The external IP packet is an internal packet based on the management of the address management table in the originating network node device. Thus, the internal packet is transferred through the IP network and reaches the destination network node device, and the internal packet is restored as an external IP packet based on the management of the address management table in the destination network node device.

  Terminals 225 and 230 (FIG. 17) are terminals having a digital media transmission / reception function. The call-side telephone management server 227 transmits a “SYN” packet to the call-side telephone management server 228, and the telephone management server 228 After transmitting the “ACK” packet to the telephone management server 227 and setting the TCP communication path in the telephone management servers 227 and 228, IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLC of the call control message based on the line connection control protocol Etc. are performed above the TCP layer. As shown in FIG. 15, the first method transmits a “SYN” packet for establishing a TCP communication path from the telephone management server 227 to the telephone management server 228 (step 210-1 in FIG. 15). Returns an “ACK” packet to the telephone management server 227 (step 210-2). Next, a series of call control messages IAM, ACM, CPG, and ANM for setting a communication path based on the line connection control protocol between the two are transmitted and received between the telephone management server 227 and the telephone management server 228 ( Next, multimedia data such as voice and data is transmitted and received between the terminal 225 and the terminal 230 (step 214). In step 214, telephone communication using the SIP procedure or the H323 procedure is also possible. When the transmission / reception of the multimedia data is completed, next, call control messages REL and RLC are transmitted and received between the telephone management server 227 and the telephone management server 228 to release the communication path based on the line connection control protocol (step 211). -5, 211-6) Next, a FIN packet for TCP communication path release is transmitted from the telephone management server 227 to the telephone management server 228 (step 210-3), and the telephone management server 228 returns an ACK packet ( Step 210-4), the TCP communication path between the set telephone management server 227 and the telephone management server 228 is released.

  Note that the TCP communication path between the telephone management server 227 and the telephone management server 228 can be released in the same manner as described above by starting transmission of a FIN packet from the telephone management server 228 to the telephone management server 227.

In the second method, as shown in FIG. 16, a “SYN” packet for establishing a TCP communication path is transmitted from the telephone management server 227 to the telephone management server 228 (step 218-1 in FIG. 16). "ACK" packet is returned from the telephone management server 227 to the telephone management server 227 (step 218-2), and a series of call control for setting a communication path based on the line connection control protocol between the telephone management server 227 and the telephone management server 228 The message IAM, ACM, CPG, and ANM are transmitted and received (steps 219-1 to 219-4, that is, step 220-1). Then, a FIN packet for releasing the TCP communication path is transmitted from the sender 227 to the receiver 228 (step 218-3), and the receiver 228 returns an ACK packet (step 218-4). Next, an operation of transmitting / receiving multimedia data such as voice and data between the terminal 225 and the terminal 230 is started (step 221). In step 214, telephone communication using the SIP procedure or the H323 procedure is also possible. When the multimedia data transmission / reception is completed, the telephone management server 227 transmits a “SYN” packet for establishing a TCP communication path to the telephone management server 228 (step 218-5 in FIG. 16), and the telephone management server 228 transmits the telephone management server. An “ACK” packet is returned to 227 (step 218-6). Then, call control messages REL and RLC for releasing a communication path based on the line connection control protocol are transmitted and received between the telephone management server 227 and the telephone management server 228 (steps 219-5 and 219-6), and telephone management is performed. The server 227 transmits a FIN packet to the telephone management server 228 (step 218-7), the telephone management server 227 returns an ACK packet (step 218-8), and the set telephone management server 227 and the telephone management server 228 are set. The TCP communication path between is released.
<< Summary-1 >>
Establish a TCP communication path between the calling side telephone management server and the called side telephone management server, and establish a media communication path for terminal-to-terminal communication by sending and receiving line connection control messages IAM, ACM, CPG, and ANM. After that, multimedia data and the like are transmitted and received between the two terminals. Then, line connection control messages REL and RLC are transmitted and received between the calling side telephone management server and the called side telephone management server to release the media communication path, and then release the TCP communication path.

  As another method, after establishing a TCP communication path between the caller side telephone management server and the callee side telephone management server, a medium for communication between terminals by sending and receiving line connection control messages IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM After establishing the communication path, the TCP communication path is released. Next, the two terminals send and receive multimedia data, and then when the transmission and reception of the multimedia data between the two terminals is finished, a new TCP communication path is established between the calling side telephone management server and the called side telephone management server. Later, line connection control messages REL and RLC are sent and received to release the media communication path and release the new TCP communication path.

  Another method for transmitting and receiving call control messages IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, and RLC for inter-terminal communication connection control after setting the TCP communication path will be described in detail with reference to FIG. When the connection request is transmitted from the terminal 225 to the media router 226 (step 240), the media router 226 returns (step 241). When the media router 225 transmits the connection request, the IP packet including the transmission request is sent to the network node device 231. The call reaches the telephone management server 227 (step 242). Here, the IP packet includes the telephone number of the calling terminal 225 and the telephone number of the called terminal 230.

  The telephone management server 227 forms a SYN packet to establish a TCP communication path and transmits it to the telephone management server 228 via the control line 235 (step 243), and the telephone management server 228 returns an ACK packet (step 244). . The telephone management server 228 forms an initial address message IAM by a method similar to that disclosed in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 164, etc.) of the prior application, and transmits the initial address message IAM to the telephone management server 228 (step 245). ). Upon receiving the initial address message IAM, the telephone management server 228 transmits a telephone call notification to the media router 229 (step 246), and the media router 229 transmits an incoming call notification to the terminal 230 (step 247). The availability of the terminal 230 is sent back to (step 248). The telephone management server 228 forms an address completion message ACM in the same manner as disclosed in the prior patent, and transmits the address completion message ACM to the telephone management server 227 (step 249), and the telephone management server 227 transmits the media router 226. The availability of the terminal 230 is returned to the server (step 250). When the terminal 230 knows the connection request at step 247, it returns a request confirmation (step 251), and the terminal 230 rings a terminal ringing tone and returns a call start to the media router 229 (step 252). The media router 229 notifies the telephone management server 228 of the call notification (step 253), and the telephone management server 228 forms the call progress message CPG in the same manner as disclosed in the prior patent, and the call progress message CPG is sent to the telephone. This is transmitted to the management server 227 (step 254). The telephone management server 227 notifies the media router 226 that the call is being made (step 255), and the media router 226 notifies the terminal that the call is being made (step 256). When the terminal 230 knows that the terminal user has responded, it returns a response notification to the media router 229 (step 257). The media router 229 returns the response to the terminal 230 (step 258) and notifies the telephone management server 228 (step 259). The telephone management server 228 transmits the response message ANM in the same manner as disclosed in the prior patent. The response message ANM is transmitted to the telephone management server 227 (step 260), the telephone management server 227 notifies the media router 226 of the response of the terminal 230 (step 261), and the media router 226 transmits the terminal 230 to the terminal 230. The response from is notified (step 262). The terminal 225 returns a response confirmation to the media router 226 (step 263).

  Through the above procedure, a communication path is established between the terminal 225 and the terminal 230, and multimedia data such as digitized voice, text data, and video data can be transmitted and received between both terminals (step 264). Next, a request for disconnecting the communication path between the terminal 225 and the terminal 230 is issued from the terminal 225 (step 265), the media router 226 responds (step 266), and the terminal confirms the response (step 267). Further, the media router 226 notifies the telephone management server 227 of a communication path disconnection request (step 268), and the telephone management server 227 returns (step 269). The telephone management server 227 forms a release message REL in the same manner as disclosed in the prior application, sends the release message REL to the telephone management server 228 (step 270), and the telephone management server 228 sends a release completion message RLC. A reply is made (step 271). Next, the telephone management server 228 notifies the communication router release notification to the media router 229 (step 272), the media router 229 returns (step 274), and further notifies the terminal 230 of disconnection of the telephone call (step 273). The terminal 230 returns a release confirmation (step 275), and the media router 229 transmits a release completion to the terminal 230 (step 276). When the telephone management server 227 receives the release completion message RLC in step 271, in order to release the TCP communication path established between the telephone management server 227 and the telephone management server 228 established in step 244, The FIN packet is transmitted to the telephone management server 228 (step 277), and the telephone management server 228 returns an ACK packet to the telephone management server 227 for confirmation (step 278). Thus, the communication path between the terminal 225 and the terminal 230 is released. Other messages of No. 7 common line signal include suspend message “SUS”, resume message “RES”, connection message “CON”, etc., which can be used for line connection control (call connection control) in the IP network. .

  The initial address message IAM, the address completion message ACM, the call progress message CPG, the response message ANM, the release message REL, and the release completion message RLC are stored in the form of the TCP packet 280 (FIG. 19). In the extension of the TCP header, the initial address message IAM, address completion message ACM, call progress message CPG, response message ANM, release message REL, and release completion message RLC message classification “MSG” disclosed in the prior application are listed. However, as another variation, the message segment “MSG” may be included in the TCP payload portion.

In the procedure, any of steps 250, 269, and 274 involving the telephone management server 227 or 228 can be omitted. Further, in the procedure, any of steps 241, 251, 258, 263, 266, 267, 275, and 276 involving the telephone 225 or 230 can be omitted.
<< Type of terminal >>
In the embodiment, when the terminal 225 and the terminal 230 are telephones, telephone communication is possible using an inter-terminal communication path that can be established by the above method. Further, when the terminal 225 is a TV transmitter and the terminal 230 is a TV receiver, audio-video communication using the TV communication function is possible using the inter-terminal communication path that can be established by the above method, and the terminals 225 and 230 are connected to each other. In the case of a computer having a data transmission / reception function, data transmission / reception by computer communication is possible using an inter-terminal communication path that can be established by the above method.
<< Summary-2 >>
The present embodiment is a method of performing the line connection control protocol in the upper layer of the TCP layer (a method of executing the line connection control protocol after setting the TCP communication path). The IP network includes two or more telephone management servers, and the media router outside the IP network is connected to a terminal having a digital media transmission / reception function from the media router to the telephone management server. An IP packet for call setting including the telephone number is transmitted, and the caller side telephone management server forms a SYN packet to establish a TCP communication path. Then, it transmits to the receiving side telephone management server via the control line, the receiving side telephone management server returns an ACK packet to acknowledge, and the calling side telephone management server forms an initial address message including call setting, and forms The received initial address message is transmitted to the telephone management server on the called side, and the telephone management server on the called side transmits the call setting to the media router on the called side. In addition, the media router on the called side sends the call setting to the terminal on the called side, and the telephone management server on the called side forms an address completion message and sends it to the telephone management server on the calling side. When the telephone management server on the side receives the report of the ringing from the terminal on the called side, it forms a call progress message. The call progress message reaches the telephone management server on the calling side, the telephone management server on the calling side sends a ringing report of the terminal on the called side to the media router on the calling side, and the telephone management server on the called side When a response is received from the called terminal, a response message is formed. The response message reaches the calling telephone management server, the calling telephone management server stops the ringing tone of the called terminal, and the calling terminal and the called terminal call the calling party. Communication between terminals that transmits / receives digital media via the media router on the called side becomes possible. Then, a call disconnection request is transmitted from the calling or called media router to the telephone management server, and a release is transmitted from the telephone management server to the other telephone management server. Disconnection instruction is transmitted to the other side media router, release completion is notified from the other side telephone management server to the telephone management server, disconnection completion is transmitted to the media router, and the outgoing side telephone management server and the incoming side telephone management server In order to release the TCP communication path established during this period, the FIN packet is transmitted to the incoming side telephone management server, and the incoming side telephone management server returns an ACK packet to the outgoing side telephone management server for confirmation. In this way, connection and release of communication between two terminals are performed.

3. Third embodiment for performing video conference communication using the multicast function of the IP network:
In FIG. 20, 300 is an IP network, 311 to 315 are network node devices, 317 to 319 are routers, 320 to 327 are terminals having a function of transmitting and receiving IP packets, and the network node devices and routers are directly connected via communication lines. Or indirectly via a router, and the terminal is connected to one of the network node devices via a communication line. The terminal is given an IP address. The network node apparatus is capable of setting an address management table based on the same principle as that described in, for example, FIGS. 293 to 295 of the seventeenth embodiment performing multicast communication of the prior application. That is, the multicast IP packet can be encapsulated to form an internal packet, and the internal packet can be decapsulated to restore the multicast IP packet.

  The functions of the IP network 300 are summarized as follows. The IP network 300 includes two or more network node devices. An external IP packet is input from a logical terminal at the end of a communication line. The external IP packet is an internal packet based on management of an address management table in the originating network node device. Thus, the internal packet is transferred inside the IP network and reaches the incoming network node device, and the internal packet is restored as an external IP packet based on the management of the address management table in the incoming network node device.

  The terminals 320 to 327 are further provided with voice and moving image transmission / reception functions, and can transmit and receive video conference voice and moving images by transmitting and receiving IP packets between these terminals. In this embodiment, the terminal 320, the terminal 322, the terminal 323, the terminal 325, and the terminal 327 are operated to realize a TV conference in which voice and moving images are transmitted and received. In particular, the terminal 320, the terminal 323, and the terminal 327 are provided to the receiver. At the same time, it becomes a transmission source of audio and moving images.

  21 and FIGS. 24 to 26, the multicast internal address IM1 is set in the network node devices 311 to 315 and the routers 317 to 319 in order for the terminal 320 to be the transmission source. When the IP packet 340 having the external destination address M1 is transmitted from the terminal 320, the IP packet 340 reaches the network node device 311 and is transferred to the routers 317 and 319 according to the address management table 331 (in FIG. 24) in the network node device 311. Is done. The IP packet 341-1 that has reached the router 317 is transferred to the network node device 312 and the router 318 using the routing table 337 (in FIG. 25), and the IP packet transferred to the network node device 312 is address management. Table 332 is used and forwarded to terminal 322. The IP packet 341-3 reaching the router 318 is transferred to the network node devices 313 and 314, and the IP packet 341-4 reaching the network node device 313 is decapsulated using the address management table 333 (in FIG. 26). Then, the restored IP packet 342-1 reaches the terminal 323. The IP packet 341-5 that has reached the network node device 314 is decapsulated using the address management table 334, and the restored IP packet 34-2 reaches the terminal 325. On the other hand, the IP packet 343-2 transmitted from the network node device 311 and reaching the router 319 becomes an IP packet 341-6 using the route table 339, transferred through the communication line 344-3, and passed through the network node device 315. The address management table 335 is used, and the restored IP packet 342-3 reaches the terminal 327.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the internal multicast address IM2 is set in the network node apparatuses 311 to 315 and the routers 317 to 319 so that the terminal 323 becomes a transmission source. When the IP packet having the external destination address M2 is transmitted from the terminal 323, the IP packet reaches the network node device 313, and an internal packet is formed by using the address management table 333 (in FIG. 26) of the network node device 313. The internal packet is transferred to the router 318, and then the route table 338 (in FIG. 25) is used in the router 318, and the internal packet reaches the terminal 325 via the network node device 314. The other one IP packet reaches the terminal 327 via the router 319 and the network node device 315, and the other one IP packet is copied by the router 319, while the other one is the terminal via the network node device 311. The other reaches the terminal 322 via the network node device 312.

Further, referring to FIG. 23, the internal multicast address IM3 is set in the network node apparatuses 311 to 315 and the routers 317 to 319 in order for the terminal 327 to be a transmission source. When the IP packet having the external destination address M3 is transmitted from the terminal 327, the IP packet reaches the network node device 315, and the terminal 320, the terminal 322, the terminal 323, The terminal 325 is reached. Note that the terminals 322 and 325 receive voice and moving image data but do not transmit them.
<< Transmission right switch >>
The terminal 320 can exchange information by transmitting and receiving IP packets with the terminal 322, the terminal 323, the terminal 325, and the terminal 327, and the operation will be described below. The record “I01, E01, E07, I07,...” On the fourth line from the top of the address management table 331 (in FIG. 24) in the network node device 311 and 4 from the top of the address management table 332 in the network node device 312. Since the records “I07, E07, E01, I01,...” On the line are set, the terminal 320 having the IP address E01 and the terminal 322 having the IP address E07 can transmit and receive IP packets. Similarly, a record “I01, E01, E20, I20,...” On the fifth line from the top of the address management table 331 and a record “I20, E20, E01, I01,...” Of the address management table 333 are set. Therefore, the terminals 320 and 323 can send and receive IP packets.

Similarly, the record “I01, E01, E25, I25,...” On the sixth line from the top of the address management table 331 and the record “I25, E25, E01, I01,...” Of the address management table 334 are set. Therefore, the terminals 320 and 325 can send and receive IP packets. Similarly, a record “I01, E01, E28, I28,...” On the seventh line from the top of the address management table 331 and a record “I28, E28, E01, I01,...” Of the address management table 335 are set. Therefore, the terminals 320 and 328 can send and receive IP packets. As described above, the terminal 320 can exchange IP packets with the terminals 323 and 327 to exchange information, and, for example, can switch the transmission terminal from the terminal 320 to the terminal 327. Also, the terminals 322 and 325 can exchange information with the terminal 320.
<< Summary >>
An IP network includes two or more network node devices, for setting an address management table used to encapsulate and decapsulate multicast IP packets in the network node devices, and to forward the multicast IP packets to routers in the IP network The sender 1 transmits the multimedia data (voice, moving image, etc.) for the TV conference by using the multicast address M1 in the IP network, and the plurality of receivers are in the IP network. Receives the multimedia data using the multicast address M1. The sender 2 transmits multimedia data using the multicast address M2 in the IP network, and the plurality of receivers receive multimedia data using the multicast address M2 in the IP network. The IP packet is encapsulated by the address management table in the network node device, transferred in the IP network, and decapsulated in the terminal network node device, so that communication using the IP packet for the TV conference is performed. Do. The terminal 320 can exchange IP packets with other terminals and exchange information for switching transmission rights. Three or more people can participate in the video conference.

4). Fourth embodiment showing a configuration method of a relay gateway for connecting an IP network and a PSTN:
The present embodiment shows a specific example of the relay gateway 106 (in FIG. 1) of the first embodiment, and corresponds to a detailed version of the relay gateway (FIG. 197 and the like) of the thirteenth embodiment of the prior application. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  400 is a relay gateway, 401 is a relay control unit, 402 is a voice control unit, 403 is an information line, 404 is a control communication line based on a common line signal system on the PSTN side, 405 is a control IP communication line, and 406 is voice communication on the PSTN side Line 407 is a voice IP communication line, 408 is an address connection table, 409 is a GW address management table, 410 is a signal station address management table, and 411 is a media path connection table. The relay gateway 400 corresponds to the relay gateway 106 shown in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment, the relay control unit 401 corresponds to the relay control unit 107, and the voice control unit 402 corresponds to the voice control unit 108. 400 to 411 relay gateway, relay control unit, voice control unit, information line, PSTN side control communication line, control IP communication line, PSTN side voice communication line, voice IP communication line, address connection table, GW address A management table, a signal station address management table, and a media path connection table are disclosed in Examples 13 and 14 of the prior application, respectively.

  415 (FIG. 27) is a gateway MIB management unit, 416 is a line connection control unit, 417 is a line number management table, 418 is a control IP communication line interface, 419 is a PSTN control line interface, 420 is a voice call control unit, and 421 is voice. Communication path unit, 422 is a media path management unit, 423 is a call information management unit, 424 is a MIB management unit, 425 to 426 are channel state information units, 428 is a channel MIB management unit, 429 is channel information management, and 430 is a voice IP A communication line interface, 431 is a conversion unit, and 432 is a PSTN voice communication line interface.

  The elements of the relay gateway 106 (FIG. 1) of the first embodiment can correspond to the elements of the relay gateway 400 (FIG. 27) of the present embodiment as follows. That is, the relay control unit 107 corresponds to the relay control unit 401, the voice control unit 108 corresponds to the voice control unit 402, the control communication line 112 in the IP transfer network 100 corresponds to the control IP communication line 405, and the IP transfer The voice communication line 114-1 in the network 100 corresponds to the voice IP communication line 407, and the control communication line 131 based on the common line signal system on the mobile communication network 101 side corresponds to the control communication line 404 based on the common line signal system on the PSTN side. The voice communication line 133 on the mobile communication network 101 side corresponds to the voice communication line 406 based on the common line signal system on the PSTN side. Here, it is known that there is no essential difference between the NNI based on the common line signal system of the mobile communication network and the NNI based on the common line signal system of the PSTN. Similarly, the relay gateway 155 (FIG. 12) can be made to correspond to the relay gateway 400 (FIG. 27) of the present embodiment.

The gateway MIB management unit 415 manages the operation status of the entire gateway, the line connection control unit 416 manages whether call control is operating normally, and the line number management table 417 is a line number for each telephone call in the IP network. The control IP communication line interface 418 manages IP packet transmission / reception, and the PSTN control line interface 419 manages signal unit transmission / reception with the PSTN. The voice call control unit 420 (FIG. 27) manages voice call transfer paths and call channel resources, the voice call path unit 421 is a part for voice calls, and the media path management unit 422 manages the media path connection table. The call information management unit 423 records call information, the MIB management unit 424 manages the operation status of the voice call control unit, and the channel state information units 425 to 426 are using the voice channel in the PSTN voice communication line 406. And manage availability. The channel MIB management unit 428 grasps the voice channel resource state in the PSTN voice communication line 406, the channel information management 429 monitors the channel state in the voice communication path block, and the voice IP communication line interface 430 receives the IP packet. The transmission / reception unit 431 performs conversion (code conversion and frame format conversion), fluctuation control, etc. between the digital voice in the IP packet and the voice block transferred in the PSTN communication line, and the voice PSTN communication line interface 432 The voice frame is transmitted and received through the PSTN line.
<< Variation >>
Another embodiment of the relay gateway will be described with reference to FIG. 450 is a relay gateway, 451 is a relay control unit, 452 to 454 are voice control units, 455 is an information line, 456 is a control communication line based on a common line signal system on the PSTN side, 457 is a control IP communication line, and 458 to 460 are PSTNs Voice communication lines 461 to 463 are voice IP communication lines.

  The elements of the relay gateway 106 (FIG. 1) of the first embodiment can correspond to the elements of the relay gateway 450 (FIG. 28) as follows. That is, the relay control unit 107 corresponds to the relay control unit 451, the voice control unit 108 corresponds to the voice control units 452 to 454, the control communication line 112 corresponds to the control IP communication line 457, and the voice communication line 114-1. Corresponds to the voice IP communication lines 461 to 463, the control communication line 131 corresponds to the control communication line 456 on the PSTN side, and the voice communication line 133 corresponds to the voice communication lines 458 to 460 on the PSTN side.

  The relay control unit 451 includes the same function as the relay control unit 401 in FIG. 27 and can exchange information with any of the voice control units 452 to 454 via the information line 455. The voice controllers 452 to 454 all have the same function as the voice controller 402 in FIG. 27, and can be mounted on a plurality of physically separated boards. The information line 455 is constituted by, for example, an Ethernet (registered trademark) branch line and is realized by contention control by the CSMA / CD method. As the voice communication lines 458 to 460, for example, an ISDN logical communication line (B + 23D or the like) can be used. The voice IP communication lines 461 to 463 can be connected to input / output line terminals of different routers.

<< Summary >>
This is an embodiment of the relay gateway (106 in FIG. 1) of the first embodiment. The relay gateway 400 (FIG. 27) has a communication line having an NNI interface of a PSTN or a mobile communication network based on a common line signaling method, and a communication line having an NNI interface based on a common line signaling method in an IP network, It includes a relay control unit and a voice control unit, and is used to implement the inter-terminal communication connection control method using the IP network disclosed in the first embodiment. In the relay gateway 450 (FIG. 28), the voice control unit can be divided into a plurality of boards 452, 453, and 454. A communication line having an NNI interface can be divided into a communication line having a control line interface and a voice communication line.

5. Set all or part of the external address in the internal packet address area
Example:
An inter-terminal communication connection control method for forming an internal packet by setting all or part of the external address in the address area of the internal packet will be described.

  29, 500 is an IP network, 501 to 504 are network node devices, 505 to 508 are routers, 509 and 510 are LANs, 511 and 512 are terminals in the LAN, a terminal 511 is an IP address EA1, and a terminal 512 is Are assigned an IP address EA2. The network node device and the router are directly connected via a communication line or indirectly connected via a router. The internal address P is given to the logical terminal 514 at the contact point between the logical communication line 513 and the network node device 501, and the internal address Q is assigned to the logical terminal 516 at the contact point between the logical communication line 515 and the network node device 502. Is granted. When the IP packet 520 transmitted from the terminal 511 and having the transmission source address EA1 and the destination address EA2 reaches the network node device 501, an internal record 523 is used by using an internal record of the address management table 521 by the method described later. The packet 523 is transmitted from the network node device 501 and reaches the network node device 502 via the communication line and routers 505, 506 and 507. The external packet 524 is restored from the internal packet 523 that has reached the network node device 502. The external packet 524 reaches the terminal 512 having the IP address EA2 via the logical communication line 515. The external packet 524 has the same contents as the external packet 520.

Next, a method of forming an internal packet from an external packet and restoring the external packet from the internal packet will be described. In this embodiment, the external packet is an IP packet defined by RFC 791 (IPv4: a packet whose address length is 32 bits). ) And the internal packet is described as an IP packet (IPv6: a packet whose address length is 128 bits) defined in RFC1332, but the essence of the present invention shown in this embodiment is different even if the packet format and address length are different. Will not change. For example, the present invention can be implemented by adopting IPv6 as the external IP packet. The external IP packet 520 (FIG. 29) checks whether the record having the internal address P given to the input logical terminal 514 exists as an internal record in the address management table 521. There is a record in the first row and a record in the second row, and an AND operation (logical product) of the destination IP address EA2 of the next input external IP packet 520 and the destination IP address mask MK2 of the record in the first row And check whether the result matches the destination address EA2x described in the record on the first line according to the following equation (1).

IF (“EA2” AND “MK2” = “EA2x”) (1)

Similarly, the record in the second row is examined according to the following equation (2).

IF (“EA2” AND “MK3” = “EA3y”) (2)

In this case, the above equation (1) is established.

Next, an AND operation is performed on the input source IP address EA1 of the input external IP packet 520 and the source IP address mask MK1x of the record in the first row, and the result is the destination address existing in the record in the first row. It is examined according to the following formula (3) whether it matches with EA1x.

IF (“EA1” AND “MK1x” = “EA1x”) (3)

In this case, the above equation (3) is established.

  Since the expressions (1) and (3) are established for the record on the first line, the destination internal address Q described in the record on the first line is selected. In this way, the internal addresses P and Q for forming the internal packet are determined. When a part of the external addresses EA2 and EA1 is compared, the bits within the range to be compared of the masks MK2 and MK1x may be “1”, and the bits within the range excluded from the comparison target may be “0”. As will be described later, when setting an external address in a partial area of the internal address, the internal address area for setting the external address can be omitted from the record of the address management table 521 in advance.

  In FIG. 30, symbol “X” represents an address region 526 having a 32-bit length, and symbol “P” represents an address region 527 having a 128-bit length. FIG. 31 shows that the external IP packet 530 is stored in the payload portion 533 of the internal packet 531, and the source address X and the destination address Y of the external IP packet 530 are stored in the header extension area 536 of the internal packet 531. Represent. The header 535 stores an internal source address P (537) and an internal destination address Q (538). In FIG. 32, the payload 546 of the external IP packet 540 is stored in a part 548 of the payload 543 of the internal packet 541, and the source address X and the destination address Y are excluded from the header 544 of the external IP packet 540. The source address X and the destination address Y of the external IP packet 540 are stored in the header extension area 545 of the internal packet 541. The header 549 stores an internal transmission source address P and an internal destination address Q.

  In FIG. 33, the external IP packet 550 is stored in the payload 553 of the internal packet 551, and the internal transmission source address P (555) and the internal destination address Q (556) in the header 552 of the internal packet 551 are stored. This indicates that the source address X of the external IP packet 550 is stored inside the internal source address P (555), and the destination address Y of the external IP packet 550 is stored inside the internal destination address Q (556). In FIG. 34, the symbol “X” represents an address region 560 having a 32-bit length, and the symbol “P” represents an address region 561 having a 128-bit length. The address area 560 is divided into two parts “a” and “b”, one part a is stored in a part of the area a (562) in the address area 561, and the other part b is stored in the address area 561. It represents storing in some area b (563). The address area 560 may be divided into three or more and stored in the address area 561 by the same method as described above. FIG. 35 shows that a part x of the address area 565 is stored in the address area 566.

  36 stores the external IP packet 570 in the payload 573 of the internal packet 571, and converts the part x of the source address X and the part y of the destination address Y of the external IP packet 570 into the header extension area of the internal packet 571. It represents storing in 575. In the header 572, an internal transmission source address P (576) and an internal destination address Q (577) are stored.

  In FIG. 37, the external IP packet 580 is stored in the payload 583 of the internal packet 581, and the source address P and the internal destination address Q of the internal packet are stored in the header 582 of the internal packet 581. A part x of the source address X of the external IP packet 580 is stored inside the internal source address P (584), and a part y of the destination address Y of the external IP packet 580 is stored in the internal source address Q (585). It represents storing inside.

A plurality of records in the address management tables 521 and 522 can be set, and the transfer destination of the internal packet can be changed by changing the external destination address in the external IP packet.
<< Summary >>
The IP network includes two or more network node devices. The external IP packet is converted into an internal packet at the ingress network node device and transferred inside the IP network, and the external IP packet is restored from the internal packet at the egress network node device. Based on the management of the records in the address management table in the node device, all or a part of the external addresses set in the external IP packet are set in the address area of the internal packet. A plurality of records in the address management table can be set, and the transfer destination of the internal packet can be changed by changing the external destination address in the external IP packet. Further, the address management table includes at least terminal address related information of the external IP packet, that is, the destination address and the address mask as registration information, so that communication of terminals whose terminal addresses are not registered in the address management table is excluded. The information security of IP communication is improved.

6). A sixth embodiment in which all or part of the external address is set in the internal frame:
In the case of the fifth embodiment, there are two internal addresses, the source internal address and the destination internal address, as the internal packet addresses. In this embodiment, the internal packet is called an internal frame, and unlike the fifth embodiment, the internal frame includes the destination internal address and does not include the source internal address. All or part of the external address is set inside the internal frame. To form an internal frame. The internal frame is less than three communication function layers, and corresponds to, for example, two communication layers to 2.5 layers. When the address length defined as the internal frame is short, an extension area and an extension header are provided in these frames, and a destination external address and a source external address are stored. Examples of the internal frame including only the destination internal address include an optical frame and an MPLS frame.

  38, 600 is an IP network, 601 to 604 are network node devices, 605 to 608 are routers, 609 and 610 are LANs, 611 and 612 are terminals inside the LAN, a terminal 611 is an IP address EA1, and a terminal 612 is the terminal 612. Are assigned an IP address EA2. The network node device and the router are directly connected via a communication line or indirectly connected via a router. The internal address P is given to the logical terminal 614 at the contact point between the logical communication line 613 and the network node device 601, and the internal address Q is assigned to the logical terminal 616 at the contact point between the logical communication line 615 and the network node device 602. Is granted. When the IP packet 620 transmitted from the terminal 611 and having the transmission source address EA1 and the destination address EA2 reaches the network node device 601, the internal record of the address management table 621 is used to form an internal frame 623 by the method described later, The frame 623 is transmitted from the network node device 601 and reaches the network node device 602 via the communication line and routers 605, 606, and 607. The external packet 624 is restored from the internal frame 623 that has reached the network node device 602. The external packet 624 reaches the terminal 612 having the IP address EA2 via the logical communication line 615. The external packet 624 has the same contents as the external packet 620.

Next, a method for forming an internal frame from an external packet and restoring the external packet from the internal frame will be described. In this embodiment, an external packet is described using an IP packet defined by IPv4 or IPv6. Even if the format and the address length are different, the essence of the invention shown in this embodiment does not change. For example, IPv6 can be adopted as an external packet. The external IP packet 620 checks whether the record having the internal address P assigned to the input logical terminal 614 exists as an internal record in the address management table 621. In this case, the record in the first row and the record in the second row of the address management table 621 correspond to each other. The destination IP address EA2 of the input external IP packet 620 and the destination IP address mask MK2 of the record in the first row AND operation (logical product) is performed and whether or not the result matches the destination address EA2x in the record in the first row is examined according to the following equation (4).

IF (“EA2” AND “MK2” = “EA2x”) (4)

Similarly, the record in the second row is examined according to the following equation (5).

IF (“EA2” AND “MK3” = “EA3y”) (5)

In this case, the above equation (4) is established.

Next, an AND operation is performed on the input source IP address EA1 of the external IP packet 620 and the source IP address mask MK1 of the first row record, and the result is the destination address existing in the first row record. Whether or not it matches with EA1x is checked according to the following equation (6).

IF (“EA1” AND “MK1x” = “EA1x”) (6)

In this case, the above equation (6) is established. Since the above expressions (4) and (6) are established for the record in the first line, the destination internal address “Q” described in the record in the first line is selected. In this way, the internal addresses “P” and “Q” for forming the internal frame are determined. When a part of the external addresses EA2 and EA1 is compared, the bits within the range to be compared with the masks MK2x and MK1x are set to “1”, and the bits within the range excluded from the comparison target are set to “0”. As will be described later, when an internal frame is formed, an external address is set in a partial area of the internal address, so the internal address area in the range where the external address is set is omitted from the record of the address management table 621 in advance. It can also be left.

  In FIG. 39, the symbol “X” represents the address area 626 of the IP packet, and the symbol “P” represents the address area 627 of the internal frame. 40 shows that the external IP packet 630 is stored in the payload portion 633 of the internal frame 631, and the source address X and the destination address Y of the external IP packet 630 are further expanded into the extension area of the header 636 in the header 632 of the internal frame 631. It represents storing in 635. An internal destination address Q is stored in the header 632 of the internal frame.

FIG. 41 shows another method for storing the external IP packet 640 in the internal frame 641. The content of the external IP packet excluding the source address X and the destination address Y in the external IP packet 640 is the internal IP packet 640. Stored in the payload portion 643 of the frame 641. A part 647 of the payload of the internal frame does not include the source address X and the destination address Y of the external IP packet 640. An internal destination address Q is stored in the header 648 of the internal frame. FIG. 42 shows another method of storing the external IP packet 650 in the internal frame 6451, and the external IP packet 650 is stored in the payload portion 653 of the internal frame 651. A part x of the external address X and a part y of the external address Y are stored in the extension area 655 of the header 656 of the internal frame 641. An internal destination address Q is stored in the header 658 of the internal frame.
<< Summary >>
The IP network includes two or more network node devices. The external IP packet is converted into an internal packet at the ingress network node device and transferred inside the IP network, and the external IP packet is restored from the internal packet at the egress network node device. The frame includes the destination internal address and does not include the source internal address. In addition, based on the management of records in the address management table in the ingress network node device, all or part of the external address set in the external IP packet is set in the address area of the internal packet. Yes. Further, the address management table includes at least terminal address related information of the external IP packet, that is, the destination address and the address mask as registration information, so that communication of terminals whose terminal addresses are not registered in the address management table is excluded. The information security of IP communication is improved.

7). Seventh embodiment showing various functions of a network node device in an IP network:
The present embodiment relates to functions and configurations of the network node device 105 (FIG. 1) of the first embodiment and the network node device 231 (FIG. 17) of the second embodiment.
In FIG. 43, the communication network 700-1 includes network node devices 700-2 to 700-4, and the network node devices 700-2 and 700-3 are device control composed of a collection of various control records relating to inter-terminal communication connection control. The external packet 700-8 including the tables 700-5 and 700-6 and transmitted from the terminal 700-7 is input to the network node device 700-2 via the logical terminal 700-10 at the end of the external communication line 700-9. Then, the packet is converted into the internal packet 700-11 by the network node device 700-2 on the transmission side, and the internal packet 700-11 is transmitted to the network node device 700- on the reception side via the internal communication lines 700-12 to 700-13. 3, the external packet is restored in the network node device 700-3, and the restored external packet 700-14 is transferred to the logical terminals 700-15 and Via the Department communication line 700-16 it is adapted to reach the destination terminal 700-17. Both the device control tables 700-5 and 700-6 are used when converting an external packet into an internal packet and when converting an internal packet into an external packet. Further, the network node devices 700-2 to 700-3 have a packet filter function, a function of converting a destination address and a port number in multicast control (hereinafter referred to as “multicast receiver address conversion function” or “multicast NAT function”). The packet filter function selects whether or not the external packet is allowed to pass through the network node device according to the management of the device control table when the external packet is converted into the internal packet. . The same applies to the restoration of the external packet from the internal packet, and the network node device is selected to pass or not to pass according to the management of the device control table.

  The external packets transferred by the communication network are IPv4 packets, IPv6 packets, Ethernet frames (Ethernet (registered trademark) Frame), etc., and the internal packets are IPv4 packets, IPv6 packets, Ethernet frames, extended Ethernet frames, MPLS frames, HDLC. Applicable to frames, external packets with expansion tags, etc. Further, in this embodiment, the external packet and the internal packet can be determined and used as follows. That is, the external packet and the internal packet are data blocks composed of bit sequence values transferred over the communication line, and include the destination address and the source address. An internal packet may not contain a source address. Also, the internal packet can include the external packet. The external packet has an area for holding a source port number and a destination port number used for identifying an application program in the terminal and a device (telephone, printer, etc.) connected to the terminal. Alternatively, the source port number and the destination port number may be included in the TCP or UDP segment placed in the payload portion in the external packet.

Next, an embodiment of IPv4 is described for the external network and the internal packet for the communication network 700-1 as an IP network, and other packet formats and communication networks will be described in the latter half of this embodiment.
<< IP network for transferring IPv4 packets >>
44, reference numeral 701 denotes an IP network, reference numerals 702 and 703 denote network node apparatuses, reference numerals 704-1 and 722 denote apparatus control tables, and reference numerals 705 and 706 denote terminals having an IP packet transmission / reception function. An external address EA1 is assigned to the terminal 705, an external address EA2 is assigned to the terminal 706, and an internal address IA1 is assigned to the logical terminal 713 that is a contact point between the communication line 707 and the network node device 703. The internal address IA2 is given to the logical terminal 704-2 which is a contact point between the communication line 708 and the network node device 702. The external IP packet 710 transmitted from the terminal 705 is input to the network node apparatus 703 via the communication line 707 and the logical terminal 713. The network node device 703 converts the external IP packet 710 into an internal packet 711 (FIG. 44) using the information processing mechanism 721 (FIG. 45) and the device control table 722, and sends it to the internal communication line 718. The internal packet 711 is transferred inside the IP network 701 and reaches the network node device 702 including the logical terminal 704-2 to which the destination address IA2 of the internal packet 711 is assigned via the internal communication line 719. The network node device 702 restores the external packet 712 from the internal packet 711 using the information processing mechanism and device control table included therein, and sends the external packet 712 to the communication line 708 via the logical terminal 704-2. Reaches the terminal 706.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the network node device 703 (FIGS. 44 and 45) and the network node device shown in the second embodiment (FIG. 17) and the prior application. The router 724 and the servers 725 to 727 are connected to the network node device 703 via communication lines 728 and 729, and the control line 715 inside the IP network 701 is connected to the router 724. The termination gateway 702-1 corresponds to, for example, the termination gateway 223-1 of the second embodiment of the present invention (FIG. 17), and the servers 725 and 726 are servers inside the termination gateway 223-1, “TES” (telephone management). Server 227) and "TNS" (telephone number server 227-1). Since 713 is connected to an external communication line, it is called an external logic terminal, and 714 is connected to an internal communication line, so it can be called an internal logic terminal.

Further, the servers 725 to 727 correspond to a telephone management server and a telephone number server (FIG. 197 of the thirteenth embodiment of the prior application) in the prior application patent. Reference numeral 733 denotes an overflow line used for multicast control, which has a function of collecting IP packets returned by the multicast data receiver at the network node device on the receiver side (for example, FIG. 311 of the 17th embodiment of the prior application). In the prior application, 702-1 is referred to as a terminal gateway with a capsule function or a terminal gateway, but is referred to as a “terminal gateway” in the present invention.
<< Function of Network Node Device >> The network node device 703 can implement the following five functions using the device control table 722 (FIG. 45). As a first function, the external IP packet is converted into an internal packet (hereinafter also referred to as “encapsulation”) and the external IP packet is restored from the internal packet (hereinafter also referred to as “reverse encapsulation”). The second function is a packet filter function. That is, conversion from one to the other between the external IP packet and the internal packet is suppressed or not suppressed by a certain selection method defined in the device control table. In other words, an external packet or an internal packet is permitted to pass or not allowed to pass by the network node device. The packet filter function is divided into a protocol filter function and a port filter function. Further, as a third function, the priority order for transmitting external IP packets input from outside the IP network to the inside of the IP network is controlled, and the priority order for transmitting internal packets received from the inside of the IP network to the outside of the IP network. To control. Further, the fourth function is divided into two. As the first (multicast control 1), an IP packet having a multicast destination address is sent to a plurality of destinations, and the reverse is directed to the multicast data transmission source (multicast data source). When a direction IP packet is detected, the IP packet can be transferred to the overflow line. A second function (multicast control 2) of the fourth function is a destination address conversion function (multicast recipient address conversion function) in multicast control, and the individual IP address and port number of the receiving side terminal from the network node device on the receiving side The IP packet restored after being converted to is transmitted. As a fifth function, an electronic signature can be attached to the payload portion of the external IP packet, converted to an internal packet, and an electronic signature can be attached to the payload portion of the external packet restored from the internal packet. The above five functions are implemented using a plurality of communication records set in the device control table 722 and various control records.
<< Relationship between device control table and address management table >>
The device control table used in the present embodiment includes the function of the conversion table of the prior patent in terms of managing the encapsulation and decapsulation of the IP packet, and similarly addresses used in the prior application and other embodiments of the present invention. Includes management table functions. << Communication Record Format >> 738 (FIG. 46) shows a communication record format for managing the main functions of the network node device. The names of these items are “ISA” and “IRA” from the left side. , “NSA”, “NDA”, “MSA”, “MDA”, “IFI”, “IFE”, “ID”, “CTL”, “PTR”. Item ISA is internal source IP address, item IRA is internal destination IP address, item NSA is network source address, item NDA is network destination address, item MSA is source IP address mask, item MDA is destination IP address mask, item IFI is internal A logical terminal identifier, item IFE is an external logical terminal identifier, item ID is a record ID, item CTL is record control information, and item PTR is a pointer to a subtable.

  Reference numeral 738X (FIG. 46) shows another format of the communication record, which includes the logical terminal identifier “PinID” at the left end, and the other items are the same as 738. The logical terminal identifier is used to shorten the search time for the internal address “ISA” in the communication record. In this embodiment, the format of the communication record will be described with reference to 738, but the format of 738X can be similarly implemented.

  FIG. 47 shows an example in which the content of the communication record is expressed in the program language C. Each item “ISA”, “IRA”, “NSA”, “NDA”, “MSA”, “MDA”, “IFI” of the communication record is shown. "," IFE "," ID "," CTL "," PTR ". In the control item CTL, bit positions “00”, “01”,..., “31” indicating the bit positions are given from the left, and the bit position “00” indicates the validity of the communication record Bit positions “01” to “04” indicate a specific method of the protocol filter function, and bit positions “05” to “08” indicate a specific method of the port filter function. The bit position “09” indicates whether priority control is performed, the bit position “10” indicates whether multicast control 1 is performed, and the bit position “11” indicates whether multicast control 2 is performed. Indicates whether or not. Furthermore, bit position “12” indicates whether or not outgoing signature control is performed, bit position “13” indicates whether or not incoming signature control is performed, and bit positions “14” to “30” are undefined. This is an area, and the bit position “31” indicates whether or not to perform record memory protection control. << First Function: Functions of Encapsulation and Decapsulation >> The first function is the same as the IP encapsulation and decapsulation according to the prior patent, and the device control table 722-1 (FIG. 48) and FIG. This will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The source IP address of the external IP packet 710 (FIG. 44) is “EA1”, the destination IP address is “EA2”, and is input to the network node device 703 via the logical terminal 713 to which the internal address IA1 is assigned (FIG. 44). 49 step 740-1). The information processing mechanism 721 identifies the external IP packet 710 and checks whether a communication record having the acquired internal address IA1 exists in the device control table 722 (step 740-2). In this case, each item of the record in the second row of the device control table 722-1 (FIG. 48) corresponds (step 740-3), and “IA1”, “IA2”, “NSA1”, “NDA2” from the left side. “MSA1”, “MDA2”, “IF714”, “IF713”, “ID1”, “CTL1”, and “PTR1”. When the value of the bit position “00” of the item CTL of the record of the detected second row is “1”, it is determined that the record is invalid, and the other records are processed. If no corresponding record is detected, the accepted external packet 710 is discarded. When the value of the bit position “00” of the item CTL1 of the detected record is “0”, an AND operation corresponding to 1 bit between the destination address EA2 of the external IP packet and the destination mask MDA2 acquired from the record is next performed. Then, it is checked whether or not the calculation result matches the network destination address NDA2 (Equation (7)). If the operation results match, the AND operation corresponding to 1 bit is performed on the source address EA1 of the external IP packet and the destination mask MSA1 acquired from the record, and the operation result is the network source address NSA1. It is checked whether or not they match (equation (8)). The above procedure is shown in step 740-4 of FIG.
IF (“EA2”) AND (“MDA2”) = “NDA2” (7)
IF (“EA1”) AND (“MSA1”) = “NSA1” (8)
For example, if the value of the destination IP address EA2 is “192.3.4.5”, the value of the destination mask MDA2 is “255.255.255.0”, and the value of the destination address NDA2 is “192.3.4.0”, the above equation (7) is established. . Further, in the case where the value of the destination IP address EA2 is in the range of “192.3.4.1” to “192.3.4.255”, the above equation (7) is satisfied, which is useful for reducing the total number of communication records. The above equation (8) is also useful for reducing the total number of communication records based on the same principle as described above.

  Furthermore, all values of “MDA2”, “NDA2”, “MSA1”, and “NSA1” can be used as “0.0.0.0”. In this way, the expressions (7) and (8) are unconditionally satisfied regardless of the values of the IP addresses “EA2” and “EA1”. As an effect, since the external IP packet is encapsulated in the internal packet regardless of the destination address “EA2” and the source address “EA1” of the external IP packet, a virtual private line can be realized in the IP network 701.

  Furthermore, the values of “MDA2” and “MSA1” are both “255.255.255.255”, the value of “NDA2” is the destination IP address “EA2” of the external IP packet, and the value of “NSA1” is the source IP of the external IP packet It can also be used as the address “EA1”. In this case, since the expressions (7) and (8) are satisfied unconditionally, the source IP address “EA1” and the destination IP address “EA2” are limited to one, that is, the IP address “EA1”. Can be used as a record for performing communication between the terminal having the IP address and the terminal having the IP address “EA2”. The record of the conversion table of the prior patent has the above-mentioned form in which the mask value is “255.255.255.255”.

  When both the expressions (7) and (8) hold, an internal packet 711 is formed with the destination internal address IA2 as the second item of the record as the destination address and the internal address IA1 as the source address ( In step S740-7), the data is sent to the internal communication line 718 via the internal logic terminal 714 that can be identified by the internal logic terminal interface IF 714, which is the seventh item of the record (step S740-10). In the above procedure, step S740-5 (packet filter control), step S740-6 (signature assignment), step S740-8 (outgoing priority control), and step S740-9 (multicast control) shown in FIG. 49 are performed. This is an option that can be selected whether or not to implement, and is not selected in the above procedure.

  The sent internal packet 711 is transferred through the IP network 701 using the destination internal address IA2 inside the internal packet 711 and reaches the network node device 702. The network node device 702 restores the external packet 712 from the internal packet 711 using the information processing mechanism and device control table included therein, and the restored external packet 712 passes through the logical terminal 704-2 (FIG. 44). The external packet 712 reaches the terminal 706.

  Next, transfer of an external IP packet from the terminal 706 to the terminal 705 will be described. The external IP packet having the source external address EA2 and the destination external address EA1 sent from the terminal 706 is transmitted through the communication line 708, and is input to the network node device 702 via the external logical terminal 704-2 to form an internal packet. Then, it is transferred through the IP network 701 and reaches the internal node device 703. The internal packet includes an external IP packet in its payload portion. The internal source address IA2 and the internal destination address IA1 of the internal packet.

Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIG. The internal packet is input to the network node device 703 via the internal logic terminal 714 (FIG. 45) (step S741-1). The information processing mechanism 721 inside the network node device 703 checks whether or not a communication record having the destination internal address IA1 of the internal packet exists in the device control table 722-1 (step S741-2). In this case, each item of the record in the second row of the device control table 722-1 corresponds (step 741-3). When no corresponding record is detected, the accepted internal packet is discarded. When the value of the bit position “00” of the item CTL of the detected record is “0”, the destination address EA1 of the external IP packet included in the payload of the internal packet and the destination mask MSA1 acquired from the record in the second row AND operation corresponding to 1 bit is performed to check whether the operation result matches the network source address NSA1 (Equation (9)). If the result of the operation is coincident, an AND operation corresponding to 1 bit between the source address EA2 of the external IP packet included in the internal packet and the destination mask MDA2 obtained from the record in the second row is performed, It is checked whether the calculation result matches the network destination address NDA2 (Equation (10)).

IF (“EA1”) AND (“MSA1”) = “NSA1” (9)
IF (“EA2”) AND (“MDA2”) = “NDA2” (10)

When both the above formulas (9) and (10) hold, the external IP packet is extracted from the payload portion of the internal packet (the external IP packet is restored), and the restored external packet is stored in the communication record in the second row. The data is sent to the external communication line 707 via the external logic terminal 713 that can be identified by the external logic terminal interface IF 713 as the eighth item. The restored external IP packet reaches the terminal 705. In the above procedure, step S741-5 (packet filter control) shown in FIG. 50 is the second function of the network node device, and step S741-6 (signature assignment) is the fifth function of the network node device. Step S741-8 (incoming call priority control) is the third function of the network node device, and step S741-9 (multicast control) is the fourth function of the network node device, which are not implemented. << Relationship Between Main Table and Sub Table >> FIG. 51 illustrates a method of referring to various control records as sub tables of the device control table from the communication record 742-1 as the main table of the device control table. . That is, the pointer item 742-2 at the end of the communication record is a sub-table filter control record 742-3, a sub-table priority control record 742-4, a sub-table multicast control record 742-5, and a sub-table signature control record 742. A pointer indicating the location of −6 is stored. The usage of each sub-table will be described later. Note that the filter control record is further described by an example of separating the protocol control record and the port control record. However, the essence of the present invention does not change even if the filter control record is not separated into the protocol control record and the port control record. .
<< Second Function Part 1: Protocol Filter >> The second packet filter function is divided into a protocol filter function and a port filter function, and the filter control record is divided into a protocol control record and a port control record. The protocol filter is composed of four protocol filters (protocol filters 1 to 4) specified by bit positions “01” to “04” inside the control item CTL (in FIG. 47) of the communication record. The protocol control record format 743 (FIG. 52) for specifying the protocol filters 1 to 4 is a record having a length of (n + 1) bytes, and includes (n + 1) items of 1 byte each. The leftmost item represents the number of protocols described in this record, and the next n items include n TCP / IP technical specification protocol expression values (8 bits).

  The protocol filter 1 defines a protocol that allows the network node device to transmit the internal packet formed from the external IP packet to the inside of the IP network (referred to as transmission permission). , “6” and “17” are permitted to be transmitted as internal packets through the network node device, and external IP packets having other protocol numbers are discarded. The protocol filter 2 defines a protocol of an external IP packet that permits transmission of an external packet restored from an internal IP packet received from within the IP network by the network node device (referred to as reception termination). Two protocols, that is, the restored external IP packets having the protocol numbers “6” and “17” are permitted to be transmitted from the network node apparatus, and the external IP packets having other protocol numbers are discarded.

  The protocol filter 3 defines a protocol that suppresses transmission of internal packets formed from external IP packets by the network node device to the inside of the IP network (referred to as transmission suppression). For example, 743-3 is two protocols, ie, protocol number “ External packets having 8 "and" 89 "are discarded, and external packets having other protocol numbers are transmitted after being converted into internal packets. The protocol filter 4 defines a protocol of an external IP packet that suppresses transmission of an external packet restored from an internal IP packet received by the network node apparatus from within the IP network (referred to as incoming call suppression). The restored external IP packets having protocols, that is, protocol numbers “1”, “8”, and “89” are discarded, and external IP packets having other protocol numbers pass through the network node device.

The communication record adopts a rule that does not specify the protocol filter 1 and the protocol filter 3 at the same time. However, when the communication record is specified at the same time, the operation of the network node device is specified so that only one of the protocol filter 1 or the protocol filter 3 is specified. You can also. Similarly, the communication record adopts a rule that does not specify the protocol filter 2 and the protocol filter 4 at the same time. However, when specified at the same time, only one of the protocol filter 2 or the protocol filter 4 may be specified.
<< Second Function Part 2: Port Filter >>
The port filter is composed of four types of port filters (port filters 1 to 4) designated by bit positions “05” to “08” in the control item CTL of the communication record. The port control record format 744 (FIG. 53) for designating the port filters 1 to 4 is a record having a length of (2n + 2) bytes, and is composed of (n + 1) items each having a length of 2 bytes. The leftmost item represents twice (2n) the number of port numbers described in this record, and the next 2n items specify the port expression value (16 bits) section defined by the TCP / IP technology. And n pairs consisting of a lower limit value of the port number and an upper limit value of the port number.

  The port filter 1 allows transmission of an internal packet that is the source port number (transmission permitted source (source) port number) of the external IP packet in the payload portion of the internal packet formed from the external IP packet, and the internal IP packet. The destination port number of the external IP packet that permits transmission of the external packet restored from the outside to the IP network is specified. The principle of the separation of the source port number and the destination port number follows the rule of the client server model in TCP communication in which the source port number used at the time of outgoing call and the destination port number used at the time of incoming call have the same value. For example, 744-1 designates three port number sections, that is, port numbers 100 to 200, port numbers 500 to 600, and port numbers 4000 to 5000. This port number is the source port number of the external IP packet (transmission allowable source port number) in the payload portion of the internal packet transmitted to the inside of the IP network, or the destination port number of the external packet restored from the internal IP packet (incoming allowable destination) Port number). External IP packets and internal packets having port numbers other than the specified conditions are suppressed from passing through the network node device. The port filter 2 allows transmission of the internal packet that is the destination port number (transmission permitted destination port number) of the external IP packet in the payload portion of the internal packet formed from the external IP packet, and is restored from the internal IP packet. A source port number (incoming permissible source port number) of an external IP packet that permits transmission of the external packet to the outside of the IP network is designated. For example, 744-2 designates two port number sections, that is, port numbers 20 to 21, and port numbers 80 to 80. This port number is an outgoing call destination port number or an incoming call source port number. External IP packets and internal packets having port numbers other than the specified conditions are inhibited from passing through the network node device. If port filter 1 and port filter 2 are specified in the same port number range, both of these specifications are valid, and as a result, it is not distinguished whether the call is outgoing or incoming, and the port number is the destination port number. The packet is allowed to pass through regardless of whether it is a source port number or a source port number.

  The port filter 3 suppresses the transmission of the internal packet that is the source port number (transmission suppression source port number) of the external IP packet in the payload portion of the internal packet formed from the external IP packet, and restores the internal packet from the internal IP packet. Specifies the destination port number (incoming call suppression destination port number) of the external IP packet that suppresses sending the external packet outside the IP network. For example, 744-3 designates three port number sections, that is, port numbers 25 to 30, port numbers 53 to 60, and port numbers 80 to 80. This port number is an outgoing call suppression source port number or an incoming call suppression destination port number. An external IP packet having a port number other than the designated condition is converted into an internal packet without being suppressed and transmitted to the inside of the IP network, or is transmitted to the external communication line as a restored external packet.

  The port filter 4 suppresses the transmission of the internal packet that is the destination port number (transmission suppression destination port number) of the external IP packet in the payload portion of the internal packet formed by the network node device from the external IP packet. Specifies the source port number (incoming call suppression source port number) of the external IP packet that suppresses sending the external packet restored from the IP packet to the outside of the IP network. For example, 744-4 designates three port number sections, that is, port numbers 25 to 25, port numbers 53 to 200, and port numbers 12000 to 13000. Suppression source port number. External IP packets having port numbers other than the specified conditions pass through the network node device. If both the port filter 3 and the port filter 4 are specified, these two specifications are both effective. As a result, it is not distinguished whether the call is outgoing or incoming, and whether the port number is the destination port number or not. No distinction is made as to whether the number is a packet, and both packets are prevented from passing. In the above case in which the passage of the external IP packet in the port filters 1 to 4 is suppressed, the search of the communication record is resumed from step S740-2 (FIG. 49) at the time of outgoing call, and step S741-2 ( The search for the communication record is resumed from FIG. It should be noted that it is possible to specify that both permission and inhibition of the protocol filter are valid only.

The IP address specifies a terminal, and the port number specifies an application program in the terminal and devices connected to the terminal. A set of IP address and port number is called a socket. The port filter enables secure socket communication between terminals. The functions of the protocol filter and the port filter described above are performed when an internal packet is formed from an external packet (step 740-5 in FIG. 49) and when the external packet is restored from the internal packet ( Step 741-5 in FIG.
<< Relationship between protocol filter and port filter >>
In the protocol filter, measures when the TCP or UDP including the port number is specified but the port filter is not specified are appropriately determined and used. For example, when protocol filter 1 (transmission permitted) is specified, transmission of TCP or UDP is permitted regardless of the port number value, and when protocol filter 2 (reception permitted) is specified, transmission of TCP or UDP is not permitted. If incoming is allowed regardless of port number value and protocol filter 3 (outgoing suppression) is specified, outgoing TCP or UDP transmission is suppressed regardless of port number value, and protocol filter 4 (incoming call suppression) is specified. In such a case, the transmission of TCP or UDP is determined to be suppressed regardless of the port number value.

  In the case where both the protocol filter and the port filter are specified, if an IP packet to which the protocol filter is applied is suppressed or deleted, it is considered that there is no IP packet to which the port filter is applied. The port filter can be specified only when the upper protocol of the IP packet to be applied is TCP or UDP, and can be determined to delete the IP packet when the upper protocol is other than TCP or UDP.

Further, as a case where the filter control record is not separated from the protocol control record and the port control record, for example, at the time of transmission, only the protocol number value 17 and the destination port number values 3000 and 80 and the source port number value 25 are permitted. It is also possible to define and use a filter control record that can specify conditions such as permitting only the protocol number value 17 and allowing the source port number values 3000 and 80 and the destination port number value 25 when an incoming call is received.
<< Third Function: Packet Priority Control >>
Packet priority control is specified by the bit position “09” in the control item CTL of the communication record. Priority levels “0” to “7” are assigned by designating port numbers, but the priority level is increased when the number increases.

  FIG. 54 describes the overall flow in packet priority control. 746 is an IP network, 747-1 to 747-3 are network node devices, and 748-1 to 748-5 are terminals. External IP packet 750-1 is transmitted from terminal 748-1, external IP packet 750-2 is transmitted from terminal 748-2, and external IP packets 750-3 and 750-4 are transmitted from terminal 748-3. Four external IP packets arrive at network node device 747-1 at approximately the same time. The network node device 747-1 sends out the internal IP packets 751-1, 751-3, and 751-2 to the internal communication line 749-1 in this order by the function of the transmission priority control, and the internal IP packet 751-4 is transmitted to the internal communication. It is sent to the line 749-2. Here, the internal IP packets 751-1 to 751-4 are formed from external IP packets 750-1 to 750-4, respectively. The transmission priority for sending the internal IP packet is determined for each internal communication line using the priority control record, and will be described in detail later.

  Next, the flow of incoming call priority control will be described. Internal IP packets 751-6 and 751-7 arrive at network node device 747-2 via internal communication line 749-3, and internal IP packets 751-8 and 751-9 pass through internal communication line 749-4. Then, it arrives at the network node device 747-2. These four internal IP packets reach the network node device 747-2 at approximately the same time, and the network node device 747-2 uses the function of incoming call priority control to external IP packets 752-8, 752-7, and 752-9. Are sent to the external communication line 753-1 in this order, and the external IP packet 752-6 is sent to the external communication line 753-2. Here, the external IP packets 752-6 to 752-9 are restored from the internal IP packets 751-6 to 751-9, respectively. The incoming priority for sending the external IP packet is determined for each external communication line using the priority control record, and will be described in detail later.

  Priority control type 0 and priority control type 1 are defined as port number designation methods for determining the transmission priority. Type 0 specifies a source port number at the time of outgoing call and a destination port number at the time of incoming call, and type 1 specifies a destination port number at the time of outgoing call and a source port number at the time of incoming call. The principle of the separation of the source port number and the destination port number follows the rules of the client server model in TCP communication for separating the source port number and the destination port number.

  FIG. 55 shows a priority control record format 754-1, which includes three items for storing a flag, a protocol, and a port number. FIG. 56 represents the priority control record in more detail in the program language C. The flag is 8 bits, the bit position “0” of the flag indicates whether or not the record continues, the bit position “1” distinguishes priority control type 0 or type 1, and bit positions “2” to “2”. “4” indicates a basic priority, and bit positions “5” to “7” indicate a contract priority.

  FIG. 57 shows another priority control table 755, which consists of three priority control records. The priority control record in the first row is an example of the priority control type 0, the basic priority is 1, the contract priority is 2, the protocol is 6 (TCP), and the port number is “4096”. The priority control record in the second line is an example of priority control type 1, the basic priority is 1, the contract priority is 4, the protocol is 6 (TCP), and the port number is “1024”. The priority control record on the third line is a priority control type 0, the basic priority is 1, the contract priority is 3, the protocol is 17 (UDP), and the port number is not specified. Since the continuation bit of the flag in the third row is “0”, there is no priority control record in the fourth row thereafter.

Of the above-mentioned priority control, in the case of the transmission priority control, the priority given to the formed internal packet is determined by the designation of the priority control table 755 (step 740-8 in FIG. 49). The priority given to the external packet restored by the designation of the priority control table 755 is determined (step 741-8 in FIG. 50).
<< Fourth Function 1: Multicast Control Function 1: >>
The first function of the multicast control function is designated by the bit position “10” in the control item CTL of the communication record. In this case, the value of the bit position “10” of the control item CTL is set to “1”. deep. 58, 757 is an IP network, 758-1 and 758-2 are network node devices, and 759-1 to 759-5 are terminals.

  First, the multicast control function at the time of transmission will be described. An external IP packet having a multicast destination is transmitted from the terminal 759-1, reaches the network node device 758-1 via the communication line, and goes through a series of steps S740-1 to S740-8 shown in FIG. S740-9 is reached. Then, since the value of the bit position “10” in the control item CTL of the communication record is set to “1”, the network node device 758-1 sees the MC control record 764-1 (FIG. 59). , Know that the internal logic terminal identifiers are “3” and “4”. Then, the internal packet formed in step S740-7 (FIG. 49) from the external IP packet is designated to be transmitted to the internal communication line 760-3 identified by the internal logical terminal identifier “3”, and the internal logical terminal identifier “ It is designated to be transmitted to the internal communication line 760-4 identified by 4 ″. Then, in step S740-10, the formed internal packet is sent to the internal communication lines 760-3 and 760-4. The format of the MC control record includes the number “n” of internal logic terminal identifiers and n internal identifiers IFI-j (j = 1, 2,... N) as indicated by 764-2. As a variation, the internal logical terminal identifier “3” is set inside the internal logical terminal identifier IFI of the communication record, and only the internal logical terminal identifier “4” is set in the MC control record. The identifiers “3” and “4” may be used. Further, when the value of the bit position “10” of the control item CTL is “0”, the multicast control function does not work, and an internal packet is transmitted to the internal communication line determined by the internal logical terminal identifier IFI of the communication record. .

  Next, the multicast control function at the time of incoming will be described. An internal IP packet having a multicast destination is transferred inside the IP network 757, reaches the network node device 758-2 via the internal communication line 761, and performs a series of steps S741-1 to S741-8 shown in FIG. Then, the process reaches step S741-9. Then, since the value of the bit position “10” in the control item CTL of the communication record is set to “1”, the network node device 758-2 looks at the MC control record 764-3 (FIG. 60). , Know that the external logic terminal identifier is “3”, “4”, “5”. Then, the internal packet restored in step S741-7 (FIG. 50) from the internal IP packet is designated to be sent to the external communication line 762-3 identified by the external logical terminal identifier “3”, and the external logical terminal identifier “ 4 ”is designated to be transmitted to the external communication line 762-4, and further designated to be transmitted to the external communication line 762-5 identified by the external logic terminal identifier“ 5 ”. Then, the restored internal packet is sent to the external communication lines 762-3 to 762-5 in step S741-10.

The external logic terminal identifier control record has a format of “n” of external logic terminal identifiers, n internal identifiers IFE-j (j = 1, 2,... N) as shown in 764-4. including. As a variation, the internal logical terminal identifier “3” may be set in the external logical terminal identifier IFE of the communication record, and the external logical terminal identifier “3” set there may be used. Further, when the value of the bit position “10” of the control item CTL is “0”, the multicast control function does not work, and the restored external packet is transmitted to the external communication line determined by the external logical terminal identifier IFE of the communication record. Is done.
<< Overflow line control >>
In FIG. 58, an external IP packet whose destination address is the same address “MA” as the destination multicast address “MA” included in the IP packet transferred from the network node device 758-2 to the terminals 759-3 to 759-5 is When the value of the internal logical terminal identifier IFI of the communication record 764-5 is set to “0” when input from the external communication lines 762-3 to 762-5 to the network node device 758-2 (FIG. 61), The input multicast external IP packet is not formed into an internal packet in the network node device 758-2, but is overflowed in the form of the external IP packet and transferred to the communication line 762-2.
<< Fourth Function Part 2: Multicast Control Function Part 2 >>
The second function of multicast control (destination address conversion function in multicast, multicast NAT function) is designated by the bit position “11” in the control item CTL of the communication record (in FIG. 47), and in this case, the control item CTL The value of bit position “11” of “1” is set to “1”.
FIG. 62 shows the format of the second control record 765-1 for multicast control. The first item on the left is “n”, the second item is “sub-1”, and the third item is “ The sub-2 ”,..., the (n + 1) th item is“ sub-n ”. The first indicates the number of sub-items, and the second through (n + 1) -th indicate n sub-items. 765-2 shows more detailed rules of sub-items, which are “IFE-j”, “port-j”, and “IP-j”, and are assigned to the communication line having the external logical terminal identifier IFE-j. This indicates that a terminal having an IP address IP-j is connected, and that the terminal receives multicast data using the port number “port-j”.
In FIG. 63, 766-1 is an IP network, 766-2 and 766-3 are network node devices, and 764-4 to 765-8 are terminals. The IP address of the terminal 766-4 is “IP-x”, and the IP addresses of the terminals 766-5 to 766-8 are “IP-1”, “IP-2”, “IP-3”, and “IP-4”, respectively. It is. First, the terminal 766-4 has a source IP address “IP-x”, a source port number “port-x”, a destination multicast IP address “M-IP”, and an external port number “M-port”. An IP packet 766-10 is transmitted (step S768-1 in FIG. 66), and the external IP packet 766-10 passes through the communication line and further through the network node device 766-2, and the encapsulation function is applied to the internal. Packet 766-11. The internal packet 766-11 has an outgoing internal address “ISA1”, an incoming internal address “IM-IP”, and a payload portion of the internal packet 766-11 is an external IP packet 766-10. At this time, the internal packet 766-11 is transferred through the internal communication line of the IP network 766-1 (step S768-2), reaches the network node device 766-3, and a series of steps S741-1 to S741 shown in FIG. Through S-8, the process reaches step S741-9. The communication record in the first line from the top of the device control table 766-30 (FIG. 65) in the network node device 766-3 is used for decapsulation. However, the communication records are “IM-IP”, “ISA1”, “NSA30”, “NDA30”, “...”. The value of the bit position “11” in the control item CTL of the communication record on the first line is set to “1”. Since the first item from the left of the second capsule control record 766-23 (FIG. 64) is “4”, there are four sub items.

  In accordance with the designation of “IFE-1”, “port-1”, “IP-1” in the first subitem 766-24, the destination external IP address IP-1 and the destination port number port-1 are specified from the internal packet 766-11. The external packet 766-12 is formed, and the external packet 766-12 is transmitted to the communication line 766-9 that is the external logic terminal identifier IFE-1 (step S768-5 in FIG. 66). The source external IP address of the external packet 766-12 is “M-IP”, the source port number is “M-Port”, and the source IP address M-IP and the source port number M-Port are the payload of the internal packet 766-11. The destination external IP address M-IP and the destination port number M-Port of the external IP packet 766-10 in the portion are transcribed.The destination IP address of the external IP packet 766-12 is transferred to the external logical terminal identifier IFE-1. The unique IP address “IP-1” of the terminal 766-5 to be connected is used.

  Subsequently, in accordance with the contents “IFE-2”, “port-2”, “IP-2” of the subitem 766-25 of the multicast second control record, the IP address IP-2 connected to the external logical terminal identifier IFE-2 The external IP packet having the source address M-IP and the source port number M-port is transmitted to the terminal 766-6 (step S768-6). Similarly, in accordance with the contents “IFE-3”, “port-3”, and “IP-3” of the subitem 766-26, the terminal 766 having the IP address IP-3 connected to the external logical terminal identifier IFE-3 is used. 7 (step S768-7), the external IP packet having the source address M-IP and the source port number M-port is transmitted. Subsequently, in accordance with the contents “IFE-3”, “port-4”, and “IP-4” of the subitem 766-27, the terminal 766-8 of the IP address IP-4 that is further connected to the external logical terminal identifier IFE-3. (Step S768-8), an external IP packet having the source address M-IP and the source port number M-port is transmitted. Here, a plurality of terminals 766-7 and 766-8 can be connected to the communication line designated by the external logic terminal identifier IFE-3. Through the above procedure, the terminals 766-5 to 766-8 finish receiving multicast data.

  After receiving the multicast data, the terminals 766-5 to 766-8 can receive or respond to the multicast data transmission terminal 766-4 and the multicast transmission management terminal 767-7, and respond from the terminal 766-5. An example will be described. The terminal 766-5 forms an external IP packet 767-1 (in FIG. 67) and sends it to the communication line 766-9 (step S768-10 in FIG. 66). The IP address and port number of the external IP packet 767-1 are obtained by exchanging the source and destination of the IP address and port number of the received external IP packet 766-12 (in FIG. 63). That is, the source IP address IP-1 and source port number port-1 of the external IP packet 767-1, the destination IP address M-IP, and the source port number M-port.

  The external IP packet 767-1 uses the record “IS5, IS73, NSA5, NDA5,. 67) and sent to the internal communication line 767-4, arrives at the network node device 766-3 (step S768-11), and the seventh line from the top of the device control table 766-30 (FIG. 65). The communication record “IS73, IS5, NDA5, NSA5,...” Is applied and decapsulated. The restored external packet reaches the terminal 767-3 via the communication line 767-5 determined by the logical terminal identifier IFE13 of the communication record (step S768-12).

The multicast data response proxy terminal 767-3 forms an IP packet including the contents of the response packet received from the terminal 766-5, and transmits the IP packet to the multicast data transmission terminal 766-4 (step S768- in FIG. 66). 14 to S768-16). At this time, the communication record “IS73, IS64,...” On the eighth line from the top of the device control table 766-30 is used. Further, the multicast data response proxy terminal 767-3 can transmit an IP packet including the response to the multicast data transmission management terminal 767-7 (steps S768-18 to S768-20). At this time, the communication record “IS73, IS67,...” On the ninth line from the top of the device control table 766-30 is used. The terminal 767-3 has a function of handling the responses from the terminals 766-6 to 766-8 in the same manner as the response from the terminal 766-5. Further, all of the responses from the terminals 766-5 to 766-8 are provided. Can be returned together in one IP packet.
<< Fifth Function: Signature Function >>
The signature control function is designated by the bit positions “12” to “13” in the control item CTL of the communication record (in FIG. 47). In this case, the bit positions “12” and “13” of the control item CTL are specified. Each value is set to “1”. In FIG. 68, 770-1 is an IP network, 770-2 and 770-3 are network node devices, and 770-4 and 770-5 are terminals. The external IP packet 770-6 is transmitted from the terminal 770-4, reaches the network node device 770-2 via the communication line, and goes through a series of steps S740-1 to S740-5 shown in FIG. 49 to step S740. Reach -6. In step S740-6, since the value of the bit position “12” in the control item CTL of the communication record is set to “1”, the signature is recorded from the signature control record 771 (FIG. 69) that can be referred to from the communication record. The function and signature parameters are acquired, the signature function unit 770-12 is used to assign the signature 770-9 to the payload portion of the external packet 770-6, and the process proceeds to the next step S740-7.

  Next, a signature adding function at the time of an incoming call will be described. The internal IP packet is transferred inside the IP network and reaches the network node device 770-3, and reaches step S741-6 through a series of steps S741-1 to S741-5 shown in FIG. In step S741-6, since the value of the bit position “13” in the control item CTL of the communication record is set to “1”, the signature function and the signature parameters from the signature control record that can be referenced from the communication record. The signature function unit 770-13 is used to add a signature 770-10 for the payload portion of the external packet 770-6 in the payload portion of the internal packet, and the process proceeds to the next step S741-7.

The signer may be a communication carrier that operates and manages the IP network 770-1. The signature 770-9 and the signature 770-10 may include the time when the packets 770-6 and 770-7 pass through the network node device. The signature function units 770-12 and 770-13 can be implemented as hardware inside the network node devices 770-2 and 770-3, respectively, or can be implemented as program modules. Also, a signature function server can be provided and used by connecting to a network node device.
<< Separation in IP network >>
The IP network can be separated into a plurality of internal networks by transferring the internal packet to the inside of the network according to the port number value in the external IP packet. A method of separating an IP network into a plurality of internal IP networks by using a communication record and a port filter function will be described with reference to FIGS. 772-1 is an IP network, 772-2 to 772-6 are IP networks in the IP network 772-1, 773-1 to 782-4 are LANs, 772-7 and 772-8 are terminating gateways, 774-1 and 774-2 is a network node device, 774-3 and 774-4 (FIG. 71) are memory areas including a device control table, 775-5 and 775-6 are device control tables consisting of a plurality of communication records, 776-1 to 776-1 777-6 is a port filter control record (one of the elements of the device control table).
<< Separation in IP network 1: Case of telephone network >>
An external IP packet having the source IP address EA1 and the destination IP address EA2 is transmitted from the terminal 773-5, and via the communication line 773-9, the logical terminal 773-30 to which the internal address I1 is assigned, and then the network node device 774-. Enter 1 The payload of the IP packet is a UDP segment, the source port number is “5004”, and the destination port number is “5008”. In this case, except for the record representing the title of the device control table 775-5, the record in the first row corresponds, and the items of the record in the first row are “I1”, “I2”, “N1” from the left side. , “N2”, “M1”, “M2”, “G2”, “F1”, “ID1”, and “CT1”. The internal address I1 given to the logical terminal 773-30 to which the external packet is input is the first item I1 of the communication record, and the 1-bit correspondence between the destination address EA2 of the external IP packet and the destination mask M2 acquired from the record In this case, the AND operation result matches the network address N2 of the communication record, and the 1-bit AND operation result corresponding to the source address EA1 and the destination mask M1 matches the network destination address N1. In this case, the IP packet has passed the address condition check with respect to the communication record in the first row.

  Next, a port filter control record 776-1 and a port filter control record 776-2 related from the communication record are specified. The port filter control record 776-1 designates the port filter 1 when the value of the bit position “05” in the “CTL” area of the communication record is “1”. It is specified that the destination port number is within the port number section 5000-5100. In this case, the external IP packet is converted into an internal packet and transmitted to the inside of the IP network, and the source port number “5004” of the external IP packet exists in the port number section “5000” to “5100”. .

  Similarly, since the value of the bit position “06” in the “CTL” area of the communication record is “1”, the port filter control record 776-2 is designated by the port filter 2, and the source port number and outgoing call at the time of the incoming call are specified. The destination port number at that time specifies that it is in the port number section 5000-5100. In this case, the external IP packet is converted into an internal packet and transmitted to the inside of the IP network. The destination port number “5008” of the external IP packet exists in the port number section “5000” to “5100”. To do. That is, since the input external IP packet passes the address condition inspection with respect to the communication record and satisfies the condition of the port number section of the port filter control record 776-1 and the port filter control record 776-2, the external IP packet Satisfies the condition for conversion to an internal packet. The internal packet formed as described above is sent to the internal communication line 773-14 which is the internal logical terminal identifier item G2 of the communication record.

  Next, the relationship between the input external IP packet and the communication record in the second row of the device control table 775-5 will be described. Except for the record representing the title, the items of the communication record on the second line are “I1”, “I2”, “N1”, “N2”, “M1”, “M2”, “G1”, “F1” from the left side. ”,“ ID2 ”, and“ CT2 ”, and the external IP packet passes the address condition check even for the communication record in the second row. Next, the port filter control record 776-3 related from the communication record is the designation of the port filter 2 because the value of the bit position “06” in the “CTL” area of the communication record is “1”. The source port number at the time of incoming call and the destination port number at the time of outgoing call specify that they are within the port number zone 4000-4100. In this case, since the transmission is made inside the IP network, the destination port number “5008” of the external IP packet does not exist in the port number section “4000” to “4100”. Formation and transfer to the inside of the IP network is suppressed.

  Further, since the external IP packet does not satisfy the encapsulation condition with respect to the other records of the device control table 775-5, the internal packet is not formed. The internal packet formed using the communication record in the first row is transferred through the IP network 772-3 via the internal communication line 773-14 identified by the internal logic terminal identifier G2, and the internal communication line 773 is transferred. The network node device 774-2 is reached via -18. Inside the network node device 774-2, except for the record representing the title of the device control table 775-6, the items in the first row are “I2”, “I1”, “N2”, “N1”, “M2”, “M1”, “H2”, “F2”, “ID4”, “CT4”, the address condition check of the record passes, and the port filter control records 766-4 and 766-5 Are applied on the same principle as the port filter control records 776-1 and 776-2. By the above method, the internal packet is restored to the external IP packet, and reaches the terminal 773-7 via the communication line 773-11. In the case where the communication direction is opposite to that described above, that is, transmission from the terminal 773-7 to the terminal 773-5, the communication record and the port filter control record are used by the same method as described above, and the transmission is made via the IP network 772-3. Communication takes place.

  A telephone is connected to the inside of the terminal 773-5, the port number “5004” is assigned to the telephone, the telephone is connected to the inside of the terminal 773-7, and the port number “5008” is assigned to the telephone. deep. In this case, the source port numbers “5004” and “5008” inside the external IP packet adopt the SIP communication protocol, which is one of IP telephone techniques. The telephone in the terminal 773-5 converts voice into digital voice and stores it inside the IP packet. The payload portion of the IP packet is a UDP segment, the source port number is “5004”, the destination port number is “5008”, and the digital The voice packet is transmitted to the terminal 773-7. The telephone set in the terminal 773-7 restores analog voice from the received digital voice packet.

The telephone communication performed by the method described above is performed exclusively via the internal IP network 772-3. The internal IP network 772-3 is used as a dedicated telephone communication network. In addition, a plurality of application programs including a telephone program are installed in one terminal, the terminal has one IP address, a different individual port number is assigned to the application program, and the application is similarly included in other terminals. A technique for sending and receiving programs and IP packets is known as a TCP or UDP communication technique.
<< Separation in IP network # 2: Quality network case >>
In this case, the application program in the terminal 773-5 operates as a client and the application program in the terminal 773-7 operates as a server. The server port numbers are “4000” to “4100”, and the client port number is predetermined. I can't. An external IP packet having a source IP address EA1 and a destination IP address EA2 is transmitted from the terminal 773-5, passes through a communication line 773-9, and passes through a logical terminal 773-30 to which the internal address I1 is assigned. Input to 774-1. The payload of the external IP packet is a TCP segment, and the destination port number is “4000” to “4100”. In this case, the record in the first row and the record in the second row of the device control table 775-5 are candidates. The communication record items in the first row are “I1”, “I2”, “N1”, “N2”, “M1”, “M2”, “G2”, “F1”, “ID1”, “CT1” from the left side. The address condition check of the communication record on the first line passes. The port number sections according to the specifications of the port filter control records 776-1 and 776-2 related from the communication records are the inside of the port number sections 5000 to 5100 at the time of outgoing and incoming calls, and at the source and destination sides. Is specified. In this case, the external IP packet transmitted from the terminal 773-5 does not satisfy the conditions of the port number section because the destination port number section is “4000” to “4100”, and the external packet is not converted into the internal packet.

  Next, the communication record items in the second row are “I1”, “I2”, “N1”, “N2”, “M1”, “M2”, “G1”, “F1”, “ID2” from the left side, “CT2” is set, and the address condition check of the communication record passes. The value of the bit position “06” in the “CTL” area of the communication record is “1”. For this reason, the port number section specified by the port filter 2 and the port number section defined by the port filter control record 776-3 specifies the section of the destination port numbers 4000 to 4100 at the time of transmission. Converted. The internal packet is sent to the internal communication line 773-13 of the seventh item G1 of the communication record in the second row, transferred inside the IP network 772-2, and passed through the internal communication line 773-17 to the network node device 774-2. To reach. Within the network node device 774-2, the record items in the second row of the device control table 774-2 are “I2”, “I1”, “N2”, “N1”, “M2”, “M1” from the left side. ”,“ H1 ”,“ F2 ”,“ ID5 ”,“ CT5 ”, the address condition check of the communication record passes, and the value of the bit position“ 05 ”in the“ CTL ”area of the communication record Is “1”. For this reason, the port filter 1 is designated, and the destination port number section “4000” to “4100” at the time of arrival is applied to the port filter control record 766-6, the external IP packet is restored from the internal packet, and the communication line The terminal 773-7 is reached via 773-11.

  In the case where the communication direction is opposite to that described above, that is, the external IP packet is transmitted from the terminal 773-7 to the terminal 773-5 (where the source port number of the TCP segment in the IP packet is “4000” to “4100”), and the network node When the device 774-2 converts to an internal packet and transmits the internal packet, the source port number section “4000” to “4100” at the time of transmission is applied to the port filter control record 766-6. Therefore, the internal packet is transferred to the network node device 774-1 via the internal communication line 773-17, the IP network 772-2, and the internal communication line 773-13. When the network node device 774-1 receives the internal packet and restores the external IP packet, the source port number section “4000” to “4100” at the time of reception is applied to the port filter control record 776-3.

In summary, the terminals 773-5 and 773-7 use telephones connected to the terminals 773-5 and 773-7 to perform telephone communication within the section of port numbers “5000” to “5100”. 4000 ”to“ 4100 ”, and other application programs of the terminal 773-5 operate as clients using the application program in the terminal 773-7. At this time, an internal network 772-2 for telephone communication is used for telephone communication, and an internal network 772-2 is used for communication between client and server. Communication lines 773-9 and 773-11 are shared for telephone communication and communication between the client and server. The internal network 772-3 as a telephone network is a network with a small number of router stages (also referred to as the number of hops) and a low delay. It can be used as a quality network that guarantees quality.
<< Separation in IP network 3: Case of multicast network >>
A method for operating the application program in the terminal 773-5 as a multicast transmission server and operating the application program in the terminal 773-7 as one of a plurality of users who receive multicast data sent from the multicast transmission server will be described. In this case, the multicast IP packet transmitted from the terminal 773-5 is input to the network node device 774-1 via the communication line 773-9, and the record in the third row of the device control table 775-5 Is used. The items of the record in the third row are “I1”, “Im”, “N1m”, “N2m”, “M1m”, “M2m”, “G3”, “F1”, “ID3”, “CT3” from the left side. It has become. When the input multicast external IP packet passes the address condition check, a multicast internal packet is formed, and the internal packet is sent to the communication line 773-15 designated by the item G3.

Thereafter, the network node device 774-2 is reached via the multicast internal network 772-4 and the communication line 773-19. Since the destination address of the multicast external IP packet is an IP address unique to the multicast, the internal packet is not transferred to the internal network 772-2 or the internal network 772-3 by the address condition check. The internal packet reaches the network node device 774-2, and the record in the third row of the device control table 775-6 is used. The record items in the third row are “Im”, “I1”, “N2m”, “N1m”, “M2m”, “M1m”, “0”, “F2”, “ID6”, “CT6”. The multicast external packet is restored from the internal packet, and the restored external packet is delivered to the terminal 773-7 via the communication line 773-11 specified by the item F2.
<< Separation in IP network 4: Best effort network case >>
An IP communication method using the internal network 772-5 between the terminal 773-6 and the terminal 773-8 will be described.

  Unlike the above-described internal network, the internal network 772-5 is a best effort network as an IP network that suppresses communication charges instead of guaranteeing communication quality. The address EA7 is assigned to the terminal 773-6, and the address EA8 is assigned to the terminal 773-8. The address EA7 uses a value different from all IP addresses used in the LAN 773-1 connected to the communication line 773-9. Similarly, the address EA8 is different from all IP addresses used in the LAN 773-4 connected to the communication line 773-12. A communication record that satisfies the address condition check for an external IP packet having the source IP address EA7 and the destination IP address EA8 input from the terminal 773-6 to the network node device 774-1 via the communication line 773-9 is a device control table. 775-5 is the only record on the fourth line. The record items are “I1”, “I8”, “N7”, “N8”, “M7”, “M8”, “G4”, “F1”, “ID7”, “CT7”, and a communication record is used. The internal packet formed in this way is sent to the communication line 773-16 designated by the item G4.

Thereafter, the internal packet reaches the network node device 774-2 via the internal network 772-5 and further via the communication line 773-20. In the network node device 774-2, the record in the fourth row of the device control table 775-6, that is, the record items "I8", "I1", "N8", "N7", "M8", "M7" , “H4”, “F8”, “ID8”, “CT8” are used in the decapsulation method. The restored IP packet reaches the terminal 773-8 via the communication line 773-12. An external IP packet in the reverse direction to the above, that is, an external IP packet transmitted from the terminal 773-8 to the terminal 773-6 is also processed in the same manner as described above, using the communication line 773-20, the best effort network 772-5, the communication line 773- 16 to the terminal 773-6. The server 727-1 inside the termination gateway 772-7 and the server 727-2 inside the termination gateway 772-8 shown in FIG. 71 are a router 724-1, a communication line 715-1, an internal network 772-6, and a communication line 715. -2 and the router 724-2, it is possible to communicate by sending and receiving IP packets.
<< Other methods for referencing control records from communication records >>
FIG. 72 illustrates another method for finding a filter control record 777-3, a priority control record 777-4, a multicast control record 777-5, and a signature control record 777-6 from the communication record 777-1. In this embodiment, the pointer item 777-2 at the end of the communication record 777-1 includes the filter control record 777-3, the priority control record 777-4, the multicast control record 777-5, and the signature control record 777-6. All pointers indicating are stored. FIG. 73 illustrates still another method for finding a filter control record 778-3, a priority control record 778-4, a multicast control record 778-5, and a signature control record 778-6 from the communication record 778-1. The communication record ID 778-7 in the communication record 778-1 is used, and the content of the record ID 778-2 is the value of the communication record ID 778-7. Then, by combining the record ID 778-7 and the pointer 778-8 to indicate the location of the control records 778-3 to 778-6 by the pointer, individual control is performed from the communication record 778-1 via the record ID 778-2. Records 778-3 through 778-6 can be found.
<< Other forms of communication records >>
A case where the values of “MDA2” and “MSA1” are both “255.255.255.255” in the expressions (7) and (8) when performing the first function of the network node device, that is, the encapsulation and the decapsulation. The two masks can be omitted. The communication record 779 (FIG. 74) is a communication record in which the items MSA and MDA in the communication record 738 (FIG. 46) are omitted.
<< Other forms of external IP packet and internal IP packet >>
In the above description, both the external IP packet and the internal packet are described using the example of IPv4. Next, another example in which an IPv6 packet, an Ethernet frame, or the like is adopted as an external packet and an IPv6 packet, an Ethernet frame, an extended Ethernet frame, an MPLS frame, an HDLC frame, or a tagged packet is adopted as an internal packet will be described. In the above description, the address is an IPv4 32-bit IP address. However, as the packet or frame is changed, the address is changed to an IPv6 address, a MAC address, an HDLC address, or the like. Further, a case where two addresses are used for an internal packet and an internal address of an expansion tag, which will be described later, and a case where one address is used will be described.
<< Another Example in which the Internal Packet includes the Originating Address and the Incoming Address >>
In FIG. 75, the external IP packet 781-11 is sent from the terminal 781-2 having the address EA1 to the communication line 781-6, and the external IP packet 781-11 is transmitted in the network node device 781-4 in the IP network 781-1. Is converted into the internal packet 781-12 (FIG. 76), transferred inside the IP network 781-1, and the external IP packet 781-13 is restored from the internal packet 781-12 in the network node device 781-5. The external IP packet 781-13 reaches the terminal 781-3 as the address EA2 via the communication line 781-9. The payload of the internal packet 781-12 includes at least the external IP packet 781-11. The internal address IA1 is given to the terminal logic terminal 781-7 of the communication line 781-6, and the internal address IA2 is given to the terminal logic terminal 781-8 of the communication line 781-9. In this case, the internal packet 781-12 is in IPv6 format, and the header of the internal packet 781-12 includes two internal addresses IA1 and IA2. Reference numeral 781-10 denotes a router having at least an IPv6 packet transfer function. The first item ISA from the left of the communication record 780 (FIG. 77) is an IPv6 128-bit internal outgoing address, and the second item IRA from the left is an IPv6 128-bit internal incoming address. The items are the same as those in the communication record 738 (FIG. 46), and the principles of encapsulation and decapsulation are also the same.

  In the above description with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, the external IP packet can be in either the IPv4 packet format or the IPv6 packet format. In the case of the IPv6 packet format, the lengths of the third to sixth items of the communication record 780, that is, “NSA”, “NDA”, “MSA”, and “MDA” are all 128 bits. And long.

  78, an external IP packet 784-11 is transmitted from the terminal 784-2 having the address EA1 to the communication line 784-6. In the network node device 784-4, the external IP packet 784-11 is converted into the internal packet 784-12 ( 79), the IP network 784-1 is transferred, the external IP packet 784-13 is restored from the internal packet 784-12 in the network node device 784-5, and the restored external IP packet 784-13 is restored. A state in which the terminal 784-3 as the address EA2 is reached via the communication line 784-9 is shown. The payload of the internal packet 784-12 includes at least the external IP packet 784-11. The internal address IA1 is given to the terminal logical terminal 784-7 of the communication line 784-6, and the internal address IA2 is given to the logical terminal 784-8 of the terminal of the communication line 784-9. In this case, the internal packet 781-12 is a MAC frame and is characterized by including two internal addresses IA1 and IA2. The internal packet 784-12 is a MAC frame, and 784-10 is a router that can transfer the MAC frame. Note that when a MAC frame or an MPLS frame having a communication function of less than three layers is used, the packet is also referred to as a frame. The first item ISA from the left of the communication record 783 (FIG. 80) is the 48-bit internal outgoing MAC address, the second item IRA from the left is the 48-bit internal incoming MAC address, and the other items are It is the same as the communication record 738 (FIG. 46), and the principle of encapsulation and decapsulation is also the same.

  The protocol type inside the header of the external IP packet 784-11 is used for the protocol filter function which is the second function of the network node device described above. That is, based on the management of the communication record 783 (FIG. 80) in the device control table, the protocol type in the TCP or UDP segment in the external IP packet 784-11 is referred to, and the selected external IP packet is stored in the internal frame ( Internal packet), and the external IP packet is restored by referring to the protocol type in the TCP or UDP segment in the external IP packet in the internal frame, based on the management of the device control table in the network node device 784-7. (Protocol filter). The port number in the TCP or UDP segment placed in the payload portion of the external IP packet 784-11 is used for the port filter function. That is, based on the management of the communication record 783, the port number of the TCP or UDP segment in the external IP packet is referred to, and the selected external IP packet becomes the internal frame (port filter). Based on the management of the device control table The port number of the TCP or UDP segment in the external IP packet in the internal frame is referred to, and the external IP packet is restored from the selected internal frame.

  In FIG. 81, the external IP packet 791-11 is transmitted from the terminal 791-2 having the address EA1 to the communication line 791-8, and the external IP packet 791-11 is converted into the internal packet 791-12 in the network node device 791-3. Then, the IP network 791-1 is transferred, the external IP packet 791-13 is restored from the internal packet 791-12 in the network node device 791-4, and the restored external IP packet 791-13 is transferred to the communication line 791-9. It shows a state where the terminal 791-5 which is the address EA2 is reached via. The internal packet 791-12 is formed by adding an expansion tag 791-15 to the external IP packet 791-11. The extension tag 791-15 is a data block including at least two internal addresses. The internal address is determined as an appropriate length as an internal rule of the IP network 791-1, for example, 20 bits, 32 bits, or 48 bits. The internal address IA1 is assigned to the logical terminal 791-6 at the end of the communication line 791-8, and the internal address IA2 is assigned to the logical terminal 791-7 at the end of the communication line 791-9. In this case, the extension tag 791-15 forming the internal packet 791-12 is characterized by including two internal addresses IA1 and IA2. 791-10 is a router capable of transferring the internal packet 791-12. The first item ISA from the left of the communication record 792-1 (FIG. 82) is an area for storing the internal outgoing address which is the internal address IA1, and the second item IRA from the left is the internal incoming address which is the internal address IA2. The other items are the same as the communication record 738 (FIG. 46). The extension tag 791-15 can include information other than the internal address, for example, priority when an internal packet passes through the router 791-10 (DiffServ router priority, etc.).

  Furthermore, when the communication record 792-1 includes an item indicating priority and the internal packet 791-12 is generated, the priority in the communication record 792-1 can be transferred to the internal packet 791-12.

To summarize the embodiment shown in FIGS. 75 to 82, external packets are input from the logical terminals of the external communication line, and the logical terminal identification information (the internal terminal or the identifier of the logical terminal to which the internal address is assigned) on the transmission side, the external If three sets of the source external address and the destination external address in the packet are determined, the incoming internal address of the internal packet transfer destination is determined based on the management of the device control table in the network node device on the transmission side. If two sets of the logical terminal identification information on the originating side and the destination external address in the external packet are determined, the internal packet forwarding destination internal packet is managed based on the management of the device control table in the network node device on the originating side. Variations that determine the address are also possible.
<< Example in which internal packet includes only incoming address >>
In FIG. 83, the external IP packet 791-41 is transmitted from the terminal 791-22 having the address EA1 to the communication line 791-28, and the external IP packet 791-41 is converted into the internal packet 791-42 in the network node device 791-23. Then, the IP network 791-21 is transferred, the external IP packet 791-43 is restored from the internal packet 791-42 in the network node device 791-24, and the restored external IP packet 791-43 is transferred to the communication line 791-29. It shows how the terminal 791-25 as the address EA2 is reached via. The internal packet 791-42 is formed by adding an expansion tag 791-33 to the external IP packet 791-41. The extension tag is a data block including the incoming internal address. Internal packet 791-42 (in FIG. 83) differs from internal packet 791-12 (in FIG. 81) in that it includes incoming internal address IA2 and does not include outgoing internal address IA1. The internal address is defined as an appropriate length, for example, 20 bits, 32 bits, or 48 bits as a rule of the IP network 791-21. The internal address IA1 is given to the terminal logical terminal 791-26 of the communication line 791-28, and the internal address IA2 is given to the terminal logical terminal 791-27 of the communication line 791-29. 791-40 is a router capable of transferring the internal packet 791-42. The first item ISA from the left of the communication record 792-2 (FIG. 84) is an area for storing the internal transmission address which is the internal address IA1, and the second item IRA from the left is the internal incoming address which is the internal address IA2. Is an area for storing The communication record 791-2 is used when forming the internal packet 791-40 from the external packet 791-41.

  Other items of the communication record 792-2 are the same as those of the communication record 738 (FIG. 46), and the principles of encapsulation and decapsulation are also the same. The extension tag 791-33 can include information other than the internal address, for example, a priority when an internal packet passes through the router 791-40 (DiffServ router priority, etc.).

  In FIG. 85, the external MAC frame 792-11 is transmitted to the communication line 792-8 from the terminal 792-2 having the 48-bit MAC address EA1. The frame 792-12 is converted, transferred inside the Ethernet network 792-1, the network node device 792-4 restores the external MAC frame 792-13 from the internal MAC frame 792-12, and the restored external MAC frame 792- 13 shows a state of reaching the terminal 792-5 having the MAC address EA2 via the communication line 792-9. The internal MAC frame 792-12 (FIG. 86) includes an expansion tag 792-15, and the other frame areas have the same format as the MAC frame 792-11. The external MAC frame 792-11 includes an external IP packet 792-16 to be transmitted from the terminal 792-2 to the terminal 792-5 in its information area.

  The protocol type inside the header of the external IP packet 792-16 can be used for the protocol filter function which is the second function of the network node device. That is, based on the management of the communication record 792-20 (FIG. 87) in the device control table, the protocol type of the IP packet 792-16 in the external frame 792-11 is referred to, and the selected external frame 792-11 is It becomes an internal frame 792-12. Further, the protocol type of the IP packet 792-16 in the external frame 792-11 in the internal frame 792-12 is referred to restore the external frame 792-13. The port number in the TCP or UDP segment placed in the payload portion of the IP packet 792-16 is used for the port filter function based on the above-described method. For example, a VLAN tag standardized by IEEE 802.1Q can be adopted as the extension tag.

  The internal address IA1 is assigned to the terminal logical terminal 792-6 of the communication line 792-8 (FIG. 85), and the internal address IA2 is assigned to the terminal logical terminal 792-7 of the communication line 792-9. The expansion tag 792-15 can include one of the internal addresses IA1 and IA2 as the internal destination address. 792-10 is a router capable of transferring the internal MAC frame 792-12. In the communication record 792-20 (FIG. 87), the first item ISA from the left is the internal address IA1, and the second item IRA from the left is the internal address IA2. The internal MAC frame 792-12 includes the value IA2 of the second item of the communication record 792-20 as the incoming internal address. Further, when the network node device 792-3 receives the internal MAC frame from the inside of the Ethernet network 792-1 and restores the external MAC frame, the network node device 792-3 uses the first item IA1 of the communication record 792-20 to receive the received MAC frame. It is checked whether or not the destination internal address is address IA1. The communication record 792-20 (FIG. 87) has the same format as the communication record 738 (FIG. 46). For example, a mask operation is performed on the external MAC address according to the same principle as the above equations (1) and (2). Further, protocol information in the header of the external IP packet in the external MAC frame, and the source port number and destination port number in the TCP packet or UDP packet of the payload portion of the external IP packet are used. When the external packet is an ether frame, the protocol filter function can be implemented using the protocol type in the IP packet 792-16 in the ether frame, and the port number in the TCP or UDP segment in the IP packet in the ether frame. Can be used to implement a port filter function or a multicast NAT function.

  88, the external IP packet 793-11 is transmitted from the terminal 793-2 having the address EA1 to the communication line 793-7, and the external IP packet 793-11 is converted into the internal frame 793-12 in the network node device 793-5. Then, the inside of the communication network 793-1 is transferred, the internal node 793-12 is restored to the external IP packet 793-13 in the network node device 793-6, and the terminal 793-3 which is the address EA2 via the communication line 793-9 It shows how to reach. The internal address IA1 is given to the terminal logical terminal 793-4 of the communication line 793-7, and the internal address IA2 is given to the terminal logical terminal 793-5 of the communication line 793-9. In this case, the header of the internal frame 793-12 is the header of the MPLS frame and is characterized by including the incoming internal address IA2. The internal address corresponds to an MPLS label (for example, 20 bits). The MPLS label employs the MPLS label multiplexing technique, and other MPLS labels can be added one after another. The communication record 794 (FIG. 89) has the same format as the communication record 738 (FIG. 46).

  Furthermore, the priority with which the internal frame 793-12 is forwarded can be included. When the communication record 794 includes an item indicating priority and the internal frame 793-12 is generated, the priority in the communication record 794 can be transferred to the internal frame 793-12.

  In FIG. 90, an external IP packet 795-21 is transmitted from the terminal 795-2 at the address EA1 to the communication line 795-10, and the external IP packet 795-21 is converted into an internal frame 795-22 in the network node device 795-5. Then, the inside of the communication network 795-1 is transferred, and is restored from the internal frame 795-22 to the external IP packet 795-23 by the network node device 795-6, and the terminal 795-3 having the address EA2 through the communication line 795-12 It shows how to reach. The internal address IA1 is given to the terminal logical terminal 795-7 of the communication line 795-10, and the internal address IA2 is given to the logical terminal 795-8 of the terminal of the communication line 795-12. The internal frame can be an optical frame using an HDLC address, for example. A router 795-11 can transfer the internal frame 795-22. The header of the internal frame 795-11 is characterized by including the incoming internal address IA2, and can also include the priority with which the internal frame is transferred. The communication record 796 (FIG. 91) has the same format as the communication record 738 (FIG. 46), and the first item ISA from the left of the communication record 796 is an area for storing the internal transmission address which is the internal address IA1. The second item IRA is an area for storing the internal incoming address which is the internal address IA2, and the internal address IA1 is transferred from the network node device 795-7 to the inside of the IP network 795-1 and sent to the network node device 795-8. This is used when restoring an external packet from an incoming internal IP packet. Other items of the internal IP packet are the same as those of the communication record 738 (FIG. 46).

Further, when the communication record 796 includes an item indicating priority, and the internal frame 795-22 is generated, the priority in the communication record 796 can be transferred to the internal frame 795-22.
<< Variation of address check in network node device >>
FIG. 206 shows communication records 797-15-1 and 797-15-2 in which the format of the communication record of the device control table is different from 738X (in FIG. 46), and the communication records 797-15-1 and 797- are shown. 15-2 is a communication record in a format excluding the second item “ISA” and the third item “IRA” of the communication record 738X. In this embodiment, the format of the internal packet 797-12 of the communication network 797-1 (in FIG. 207) is the same as the format of the external packet 797-11 of the communication network 797-1, and further the internal of the communication network 797-1. The address and the external address are characterized in that the addresses are assigned according to a unified standard. The address of the terminal 797-2 is “EA1”, and the IP address of the terminal 797-5 is “EA2”. The packet is, for example, in IPv4 or IPv6 format, and the address is, for example, a unified global IP address.

The external packet 797-11 transmitted from the terminal 797-2 is input to the communication network 797-1 from the logical terminal 797-6 via the communication line 797-8, and in the network node device 797-3, the logical terminal 797- A communication record to which a logical terminal identifier “Pin-ID1” for identifying 6 is assigned is searched. When the communication record 797-15-1 is found in the network node device 797-3, an AND corresponding to 1 bit between the destination address “EA2” of the external IP packet 797-11 and the destination mask “MDA2” acquired from the record. An operation is performed to check whether the operation result matches the network destination address “NDA2” (equation (11)). If the operation result matches, then the source address “EA1” of the external IP packet 797-11 is An AND operation corresponding to 1 bit with the destination mask “MSA1” acquired from the record is performed to check whether the operation result matches the network source address “NSA1” (Equation (12)).

IF (“EA2”) AND (“MDA2”) = “NDA2” (11)
IF (“EA1”) AND (“MSA1”) = “NSA1” (12)

When both the above equations (11) and (12) are not satisfied, the external packet 797-11 is discarded, and when it is satisfied, the external packet 797-11 is selected, and the external packet 797-11 is directly used as the internal packet 797. -12.

  The internal packet 797-12 selected by the address check using the registration information in the network node device using the above expressions (11) and (12) is in the direction of the destination address “EA2” of the internal packet 797-12. As a result, the packet passes through the router 797-10 in the communication network 797-1 and reaches the network node device 797-4. The internal packet 797-12 that has arrived is applied with the communication record 797-15-2 in the network node device 797-4, the address check similar to that described above is applied, and the external IP packet 797-13 obtained by selection is obtained. Reaches the terminal 797-5 with the address “EA2” via the logical terminal 797-7 and the communication line 797-9. However, the calculation is performed with the source address and the destination address reversed. The address check by the equations (11) and (12) is the same as the address check by the equations (7) and (8). One of the address check at the originating network node device and the address check at the called network node device can be omitted.

  Thus, it is easy to avoid a DOS attack that intensively sends meaningless garbage packets to the terminal 797-5, and the safety of packet transmission / reception can be improved. This embodiment does not implement the first function (encapsulation and decapsulation) of the network node device, but all other functions, that is, the second function (packet filter function), the third function (packet priority) Control), the fourth function (multicast control), and the fifth function (signature function), and the second to fifth functions are described in this embodiment.

The embodiment shown in FIGS. 206 and 207 is summarized as follows. The communication network includes two or more network node devices, the packet is input to the network node device from the logical terminal at the end of the external communication line 1, and the network node device on the transmission side uses the in-network node device registration information to check the address. The packet selected by is transferred through the inside of the communication network, and the packet reaches the destination network node device and is again subjected to an address check using the registration information of the network node device. The address in the external packet and the address in the internal packet that are sent are addresses that conform to the same standard, and the encapsulation and decapsulation functions are not implemented, but at least the packet filter function, packet priority control, multicast control, and signature function By implementing this, the information security of the communication network can be improved.
<< Billing using record ID in communication record >>
The ninth item ID of the communication record 738 (FIG. 46) is a record ID that can be used to distinguish one record from another record. For example, in order for the server 725 (FIG. 45) to read and rewrite various control records in the device control table 722, the target record can be specified using the record ID. It can also be used to identify control records and charge communication charges. Also, the first function of the network node device that refers to the communication record by rewriting the value of the first bit (FIG. 47) of the 10th item CTL of the communication record 738 from “0” to “1” ( Encapsulation and decapsulation) can be temporarily stopped. Further, since the value of the first bit can be returned to “0” and the first function of the network node device can be returned to normal operation, for example, communication of a person who has not paid the communication fee can be temporarily stopped. .
<< Memory protection bit of communication record >>
The last bit (FIG. 47) of the tenth item CTL of the communication record 738 is a memory protection bit for permitting or prohibiting rewriting of the communication record. When the memory protection bit is “1”, rewriting of the communication record is prohibited, and when the memory protection bit is “0”, the communication record can be rewritten. Memory protection can also be implemented in conjunction with the hardware functions inside the network node device 703 (FIG. 45).

To summarize the embodiment of FIGS. 83 to 91, an external packet is input from the logical terminal of the external communication line, and three sets of the logical terminal identification information on the transmission side, the source external address and the destination external address in the external packet are determined. For example, an internal packet is transferred between the network node device on the transmission side and the reception side based on the management of the device control table in the network node device on the transmission side and the reception side and the control table on the relay device. Communication line is determined. When an MPLS frame is applied as an internal packet, the internal communication line can also be referred to as an internal path. If two sets of the logical terminal identification information on the transmission side and the destination external IP address in the external packet are determined, the basis for managing the device control table in the network node device on the transmission side and the reception side and the control table on the relay device In addition, a variation is also possible in which the internal communication line to which the internal packet is transferred is determined.
<< Summary >>
The communication network includes two or more network node devices. The external packet becomes an internal packet based on the management of the device control table of the network node device, the internal packet is transferred inside the communication network, and the device control of the network node device on the receiving side is performed. It is restored as an external packet based on the management of the table, and the device control table includes at least one external IP address related information used for communication between terminals outside the communication network and one or more communication records including address related information included in the internal packet. Including. An external IP packet sent from an external terminal is input from the logical terminal at the end of the external communication line, and the source internal IP address assigned to the source logical terminal, the source external IP address and the destination external IP in the external IP packet The incoming internal address of the internal packet is determined using the address and the communication record in the device control table inside the network node device on the transmission side (address check). Then, the internal packet is transferred inside the communication network to reach the incoming network node device, and the external IP packet is restored by using the communication record of the device control table in the incoming network node, and other external communication It is delivered to other terminals via the line. If the destination external address value of the external IP packet is different, the transfer destination of the internal packet can be made different. In the communication record, even if the set of the internal source IP address ISA, the network source address NSA, and the source IP address mask MSA is the same, the set of the network destination address NDA, the destination IP address mask MDA, and the internal destination IP address IRA is changed. Thus, the transfer destination of the internal packet can be changed.

  The basic function of the network node device is to encapsulate an external IP packet and send it to the inside of the IP network, decapsulate the internal packet and send it to the outside of the IP network, and suppress IP packets having unregistered addresses. . More specifically, the network node device functions as an outgoing call as an internal address assigned to a logical terminal that is a contact point between the external communication line and the network node device, and an external source IP included in an external IP packet input from the external communication line. When three sets of an address and an external destination IP address are included in a communication record in the device control table in the network node device, the external IP packet is converted into an internal IP packet.

  Furthermore, the network node device includes at least one of a protocol filter function and a port filter function. The protocol filter function controls whether or not to convert an external IP packet into an internal packet according to the protocol in the input external IP packet as a function at the time of transmission. The port filter function receives an internal IP packet from the inside of the IP network as a function at the time of arrival, and from the internal IP packet according to the port number of the external IP packet included in the payload portion in the input internal IP packet. Controls whether to restore the external packet and send it to the external communication line. The port filter function controls whether or not to restore the external packet from the internal IP packet according to the port number of the external IP packet included in the payload in the input internal IP packet. There are a plurality of communication records in the device control table, and the transfer destination of the internal packet can be changed by changing the external destination address. An IP communication network is constructed in which the external packet selected by referring to the protocol type in the external packet based on the management of the device control table becomes the internal packet, and the external packet not selected is discarded. You can also.

  As a function at the time of transmission of the network node device, a set of the external source IP address and the external destination IP address included in the external IP packet input from the external communication line is included in the communication record in the device control table in the network node device. Is to determine the destination internal address of the internal packet (address check). Further, the set of the internal packet transmission internal address and the incoming internal address can specify the internal communication line to which the internal packet is transferred. Furthermore, the function of converting the external IP packet inside the network node device into the internal packet and the function of reverse conversion can be performed as a program inside the network node device. The function of converting an external IP packet into an internal packet and the function of reverse conversion can be performed as a functional circuit inside the network node device.

  The packet filter function of the network node device includes a protocol filter that uses a protocol type in an external IP packet and a port filter function that uses a port number such as payload TCP or UDP segment in the external IP packet. The protocol filter allows the packet to pass according to the protocol passing condition of the external IP packet entering the network node device or prevents the packet from passing. The port filter also allows the packet to pass according to the port passing condition of the external IP packet entering the network node device, or prevents the packet from passing. Using filtering control table, it works at both outgoing and incoming calls.

  Among the functions of the network node device, packet priority control, multicast control (part 1 and part 2), and signature control are selectable options. The function of outgoing priority control in packet priority control is to control the priority of receiving IP packets from an external communication line and transmitting IP packets from the network node device to the inside of the IP network. This function controls the order in which IP packets are received from the inside of the IP network to the network node device and transmitted to the external communication line. In either case, a packet priority control table is used. Multicast control No. 1 is a function (overflow line control) for sending a packet having a multicast address to a plurality of destinations and detecting and collecting packets in the reverse direction, and uses a multicast control table. Multicast control No. 2 is a function (multicast recipient address conversion function) for converting the destination multicast IP address to another IP address. More specifically, the network node device on the receiving side can transmit the external packet restored after being converted into the individual IP address and port number of the receiving side terminal. Signature control is to assign a timed signature when an external packet passes through the originating network node device as a function of the outgoing signature, and to the external packet restored by the incoming network node device as the incoming signature function. This is to add a signature with time, and uses a signature control table.

  By using the communication record and the port filter, the IP network can be separated into a plurality of internal networks. The external packet becomes an internal packet based on management of the device control table, and the internal packet is transferred to a different internal network according to the port number in the payload (TCP / UDP or the like) in the external IP packet. Two or more internal networks can be set, and the internal packet is restored to an external packet by the network node device on the receiving side. With this method, communication can be performed between two terminals, and the IP network can be separated into a plurality of internal networks based on this method.

  Based on the management of the device control table, the external packet selected by referring to the port number of the payload in the external packet becomes an internal packet, and a communication network is constructed in which the external packet not selected is discarded. be able to. A communication network in which an external packet is restored from an internal packet selected by referring to the port number of the payload in the internal packet based on management of the device control table, and the internal packet not selected is discarded. Can be built. Use protocol filter 4 (suppress protocol specified at incoming) or port filter 3 and port filter 4 (suppress specified port number) function to specify protocol and port number to exclude IP packet A communication network with a specific packet exclusion function can be constructed.

  A communication fee can be imposed by specifying the communication record using the record ID inside the communication record. In addition, for the IP network, it is possible to temporarily stop or recover the encapsulation and decapsulation functions using the communication record using the record valid bit in the communication record. In the case where the external packet is an Ether frame, the protocol filter function can be implemented using the protocol type inside the IP packet inside the Ether frame. Furthermore, the port filter function and the multicast control 2 function can be implemented using the port number of the payload in the IP packet inside the Ether frame. The internal packet can be any of an IPv4 packet, an IPv6 packet, an Ethernet frame, an extended Ethernet frame, an MPLS frame, an HDLC frame, and an external packet with an extension tag. The communication record is an internal source IP address, internal destination IP address, network source address, network destination address, source IP address mask, destination IP address mask, internal logical terminal identifier, external logical terminal identifier, record ID, record control information, IP capsule And a sub-table include a filtering control table, a packet priority control table, a multicast control table, and a signature control table. The function of the control table can be realized as a network node device, and further realized as a communication function program module as a communication function circuit.

The format of the external packet and the format of the internal packet are the same, and a variation of the communication network that performs an address check within the network node device is also possible. Since the device control table disclosed in the seventh embodiment includes an address management table function, the address management tables (FIGS. 24 to 26) used in the third embodiment are disclosed in the seventh embodiment. Can be replaced by the device control table (FIGS. 120 and 46). Furthermore, as a variation of the device control table, a variation (FIG. 206) of the device control table for the address check can be implemented.
<< Relationship with Conventional Invention >>
The main part of the present invention is a packet filter function, a multicast recipient address translation function (multicast NAT function), and separation within the IP network using port numbers. The basic part of encapsulation and decapsulation (first function) is in Example 1 of the prior patent, and the basic part of priority control (third function) is in Example 32 and Example 33 of the prior patent. The basic part of the overflow line for multicast control (fourth function 1) is disclosed in Examples 17 and 18 of the prior patent, and the basic part of signature control is disclosed in Example 21 of the prior patent. The present invention discloses a method of implementing a packet filter function and a multicast NAT function in combination with the other functions, and discloses various embodiments of an external packet and an internal packet.

8). Eighth embodiment in which fixed telephone, mobile telephone and multimedia communication are carried out in the same IP network:
In FIG. 92, the IP communication network 900 includes termination gateways 901-1 to 901-5. The fixed telephones 905-1 to 905-4 are each connected to one of the media routers 903-1 to 903-4 via a wired communication line, and the mobile telephones 905-5 to 905-8 are respectively wirelessly connected. It can be connected to one of the radio base stations 902-1 to 902-4 via a line. It is not fixed to which radio base station the mobile telephones 905-5 to 905-8 are connected. The media router and the radio base station are connected to one of the network node devices via a communication line having an IP packet transfer function. Reference numerals 905-10 to 905-17 are terminals having an IP packet transmission / reception function, and each is connected to a media router via a communication line.

  An operation management server 915 of the IP communication network 900 is connected to the router 911-1 via a communication line. The mobile telephone can be any of a voice telephone, a telephone with an image input / output function, a voice image transmitting / receiving apparatus, and a mobile terminal. The termination gateway 901-1 includes a network node device 906-1 and a termination control unit 914-1, the network node device 906-1 includes a device control table 910-1, and the termination control unit 914-1 is a proxy telephone server 906-. 2, a table management server 906-3, a telephone management server 906-4, a telephone number server 906-5, a proxy mobile telephone server 906-6, and a router 916-1. The servers 906-2 to 906-5, the network node device 906-1, and the router 916-1 are directly or indirectly connected via a communication line. Similarly, the termination gateway 901-2 includes a network node device 907-1 and a termination control unit 914-2, the network node device 907-1 includes a device control table 910-2, and the termination control unit 914-2 is a proxy telephone. A server 907-2, a table management server 907-3, a telephone management server 907-4, a telephone number server 907-5, a proxy mobile telephone server 907-6, and a router 916-2 are included.

  Similarly, the termination gateway 901-3 includes a network node device 908-1 and a termination control unit 914-3, the network node device 908-1 includes a device control table 910-3, and the termination control unit 914-3 is a proxy telephone. A server 908-2, a table management server 908-3, a telephone management server 908-4, a telephone number server 908-5, a proxy mobile telephone server 908-6, and a router 916-3 are included. Similarly, the termination gateway 901-4 includes a network node device 909-1 and a termination control unit 914-4, the network node device 909-1 includes a device control table 910-4, and the termination control unit 914-4 is a proxy telephone. A server 909-2, a table management server 909-3, a telephone management server 909-4, a telephone number server 909-5, a proxy mobile telephone server 909-6, and a router 916-4 are included.

  Reference numeral 995 denotes a higher-level telephone number server, 990-1 and 990-2 are users, 991-1 and 991-2 are acceptors, and 992-1 and 992-2 are user service servers. In contrast to the upper telephone number server 995, the telephone number servers 906-5 to 909-5 are also referred to as lower telephone number servers.

In the present invention, the identification symbol is also used as a telephone number or an Internet host name (for example, Host1.domain1.domain2.com.) In order to identify a telephone or a terminal. The telephone number server inputs an identification symbol and returns a corresponding IP address and related information. The routers 916-1 to 916-4 are connected to each other via a communication line or router of the IP network 900. Communication lines 912-1 to 912-6 are called control communication lines of the IP network 900. Communication lines 913-1 to 913-5 are called media communication lines inside the IP network 900.
<< NNI and UNI >>
The IP packet transmission / reception procedure between the telephone management servers is called an IP packet transmission / reception procedure according to the NNI interface (Network Network Interface). The NNI interface is unified in the IP network 900. The IP packet transmission / reception procedure between the media router and the telephone management server is called an IP packet transmission / reception procedure by UNI (User Network Interface), and the UNI is called the UNI of the media router. Similarly, an IP packet transmission / reception procedure between the radio base station and the telephone management server is referred to as an IP packet transmission / reception procedure by UNI, and the UNI is referred to as a UNI of the radio base station. Different media routers and radio base stations can have different UNIs. The telephone number server holds the media router UNI and the radio base station UNI.

The wireless base stations 902-1 to 902-4, the media routers 903-1 to 903-4, and the IP terminals 905-10 to 905-17 each have an IP address that can be distinguished from the others, and each of them has an IP address to the proxy telephone server. For this purpose, the IP address of the media router, wireless base station, telephone or terminal is stored in the communication record of the device control table of the network node device connected via the communication line. Is set. A specific implementation method of the communication record is described in another embodiment of the present invention. In the communication cases 1 to 5, the NNI interface adopts a form in which the inter-terminal communication connection method based on the common line signal system is applied to the IP network.
<< Communication case 1: Communication between fixed telephone and fixed telephone >>
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining telephone communication from the mobile telephone 905-1 to the fixed telephone 905-4. The telephone number of the telephone 905-1 is “TN1”, and the telephone number of the telephone 905-4 is “TN2”. . Here, the media router 903-1 includes the external IP address “EA1”, the media router 903-4 includes the external IP address “EA2”, and the internal IP address “IA1” is connected to the terminal logical terminal of the communication line 917-1. And the internal IP address “IA2” is assigned to the terminal logical terminal of the communication line 917-2. The proxy telephone server 906-2 is assigned an external IP address “EA81” and an internal IP address “IA81”, and the telephone management server 906-4 is assigned an internal IP address “IA91”. Similarly, the proxy telephone server 909-2 is assigned an external IP address “EA82” and an internal IP address “IA82”, and the telephone management server 909-4 is assigned an internal IP address “IA92”. The telephone number server 906-5 is given an internal address “IA96”.
<< Connection Phase >>
The handset of the telephone 905-1 is raised and a call connection request is transmitted to the media router 903-1 (step A01), and the media router 903-1 returns a call connection request acceptance (step A02). Next, the media router 903-1 sets the transmission source IP address “EA1”, the destination IP address “EA81”, the transmission source telephone number “TN1”, the destination telephone number “TN2”, and telephone voice transmission communication. An IP packet 920 (FIG. 94) including a call setting request such as the UDP port number “5006” and additional information “Info1” used for the above is formed and transmitted to the network node device 906-1 (step A04). The payload of the IP packet 920 is a UDP packet, and the transmission source and destination port numbers are both “5060”. The additional information “Info1” is the voice compression method type of the telephone 905-1, and the media router 903-4 of the communication partner uses the additional information “Info1”.

  The network node device 906-1 uses the internal IP address “IA1” given to the end of the communication line input by the external IP packet 920 and the destination IP address “EA81” in the IP packet 920 to control the device. Table 910-1 (FIG. 120) is searched, and in this case, the record in the first row, that is, the record “IA1, IA81, NA1, NA81, MA1, MA81,...” Is applied. The internal packet 921 (FIG. 95) is formed and transmitted to the proxy telephone server 906-2 whose internal IP address is “IA81” (step A05). It is also possible to adopt a method in which the values of the third item “NA1” and the fifth item “MA1” of the record are both set to zero. In this case, an application method in which the condition of the source IP address for encapsulation, which is the first function of the communication record described using the equation (8), is relaxed.

When proxy phone server 906-2 receives IP packet 921, IP packet 922 including the payload portion of IP packet 921 and addresses “EA1, IA1, EA81, 1A81” in the payload portion (FIG. 96). Is transmitted to the telephone management server 906-4 (step A06).
<< Restrictions on the number of calls per line >>
The telephone management server 906-4 extracts the source IP address “EA1” from the received IP packet 922, compares it with the call management table 918-1 (FIG. 124), and records the IP address “EA1”. In this embodiment, the number of lines in use is “2”, the number of lines in use is increased by “1” to “3”, and compared with the upper limit number of lines. Since the upper limit number of lines is “5”, the process proceeds to the next procedure, and if not, the subsequent process is interrupted.
<< Line number management >>
The telephone management server 906-4 reads out the IP packet 922 (FIG. 96), extracts the transmission source telephone number “TN1” and the destination telephone number “TN2”, and follows a predetermined rule from the set of these two telephone numbers. A line number “CIC-2” for managing communication between terminals is calculated. Next, as a record in the second row of the CIC management table 923 (FIG. 97), the line number “CIC-2”, the source telephone number “TN1”, the destination telephone number “TN2”, and the external IP address “ EAl ”and internal IP address“ IA1 ”, external IP address“ EA81 ”and internal IP address“ IA81 ”, internal IP address“ IA91 ”of the telephone management server 906-4, and procedure classification“ IAM ”; Write time (year / month / day / hour / minute / second) “St-2”.

  Further, the telephone management server 906-4 shows the destination telephone number “TN2” and the IP packet 924 (FIG. 98) including a question regarding the transmission source telephone number “TN1” in the telephone number server 906-5. (Step A07), the telephone number server 906-5 sets the external IP address “EA2” of the media router 903-4 to which the telephone set 905-4 is connected and the internal IP assigned to the end of the communication line 917-2. Address “IA2”, external IP address “EA82” and internal IP address “IA82” of proxy telephone server 909-2, IP address “IA92” of telephone management server 909-4, media router 903-1 The IP packet 925 (FIG. 99) including the UNI interface “UNI1” and the media router 903-4 UNI interface “UNI2” is telephoned. Lisa - to respond to the server 906-4 (step A08). Note that the telephone number server 906-5 obtains “UNI2” by inquiring of the UNI interface of the media router 903-4 to the telephone number server 909-5 via the higher-order telephone number server 995. The information exchange function between the telephone number servers will be described later.

The telephone management server 906-4 adds the IP addresses and UNI interface acquired from the telephone number server 906-5 to the CIC management table 923 (FIG. 97). This result is shown in the second line record of the CIC management table 926-1 (FIG. 100). When the telephone management server 906-4 transmits / receives an IP packet to / from the media router 903-1 side, it uses the UNI interface “UNI1” in the CIC management table 926-1 to perform subsequent communication procedures (steps A35, A45, A55). , A73, A85, etc.).
<< Variation of UNI acquisition >>
The UNI of the media router 903-1 can also check the UNI of the media router 903-1 from the IP address of the proxy telephone server 906-2 using the UNI search table 925-1 (FIG. 101). In step A07, the telephone management server 906-2 inquires only about the destination telephone number “TN2”. In this method, the proxy telephone server 906-2 communicates only with a plurality of media routers having the same UNI. It should be noted that a plurality of proxy telephone servers are installed inside the terminating gateway 901-1, and the proxy telephone servers that handle the respective UNIs in advance, such as the proxy telephone server 1 dedicated to the media router 1 and the proxy telephone server 2 dedicated to the media router 2. Can be installed, and the UNI of each communication media router can be handled.
<< NNI >>
Next, the telephone management server 906-4 refers to the IP address information in the CIC management table 926-1 (FIG. 100) and makes an IP packet 927 (FIG. 102) for making a call setting request from the packet 922 (FIG. 96). ) (IAM packet) is formed, and the IP packet 927 is transmitted to the telephone management server 909-4 (step A21). Here, the source IP address of the IP packet 927 is “IA91” of the telephone management server, and the destination IP address is “IA92” of the telephone management server 909-4.
<< Rules for the number of incoming calls per line >>
The telephone management server 909-4 extracts the address “EA2” of the destination media router 903-4 from the received IP packet 927 (FIG. 102), and compares it with the incoming call management table 918-2 (FIG. 125). In this embodiment, the number of lines in use is “2”, the number of lines in use is increased by “1” to “3”, and compared with the upper limit number of lines. Since the upper limit number of lines is “7”, the process proceeds to the next procedure, and if not, the subsequent processing is interrupted.
<< Line number management >>
Upon receiving the IP packet 927, the telephone management server 909-4 receives the line number “CIC-2”, the procedure classification “IAM”, the transmission source telephone number “TN1”, and the destination telephone included in the payload. The number “TN2” and the IP address (“EA1”, “IA1”, “EA81”, “lA81”, “lA91”, “EA2”, “IA2”, “EA82”, “IA82”, “IA92”, “ UNI2 ″) and the UNI type are taken out and written and recorded as a record in the CIC management table 926-2 (FIG. 103) managed by the telephone management server 909-4. In this case, it is the record on the first line, and the write time “St-3” is also written. Thereafter, when the telephone management server 909-4 transmits / receives an IP packet to / from the media router 903-4 side, the communication procedure based on the UNI interface “UNI2” in the CIC management table 926-1 (steps A22, A33, A43, A53, A76, A83, etc.) are employed.

  Next, the telephone management server 909-4 forms an IP packet 928 (FIG. 104) using the information acquired from the IP packet 927, and transmits it to the proxy telephone server 909-2 (step A22). The payload of the IP packet 928 includes a UDP segment and an address area, and includes the IP address “EA1” of the transmission source media router 903-1 inside the UDP segment. The address area includes IP addresses “EA2, IA2, EA82, IA82”.

  The proxy telephone server 909-2 uses the information acquired from the IP packet 928 to form an IP packet 929 (FIG. 105) and transmits it to the network node device 909-1. The IP packet 929 having the source address “IA82” and the destination address “IA2” arrives at the network node device 909-1 (step A23), and the network node device 909-1 receives the device control table 910-4 ( 123), the received IP packet 929 is decapsulated to form an IP packet 930 (FIG. 106), and then the IP packet 930 is transmitted to the media router 903-4 (step A24). The media router 903-4 receives the IP packet 930, confirms whether the destination telephone number “TN2” included therein can be received, and sends a call reception notification to the telephone 905-4 if the reception is possible. (Step A25).

  Further, the media router 903-4 determines the contents of the IP packet 930, that is, the transmission source telephone number “TN1”, the destination telephone number “TN2”, the transmission source IP address “EA1”, the transmission source UDP port number “5006”. ", Additional information" Info1 "is read and held. The media router 903-4 informs the possibility of incoming of the telephone set 905-4 (classification of whether incoming is possible or not), so that the IP including the source telephone number “TN1”, the destination telephone number “TN2” and the incoming possibility A packet is generated and notified to the telephone management server 909-4 (steps A31, A32, A33). The telephone management server 909-4 receives the IP packet formed and transmitted by the media router 903-4. From the received IP packet, the transmission source telephone number “TN1”, the destination telephone number “TN2” and the incoming call can be received. Take out sex intelligence. Then, the line number “CIC-2” is calculated from the two telephone numbers, and an IP packet 931 (FIG. 107) (ACM packet) including the line number “CIC-2” and the call acceptance / rejection information is formed. -It transmits to bar 906-4 (step A34). The telephone management server 906-4 extracts the line number “CIC-2” and the procedure classification “ACM” from the received IP packet 931, and the CIC management table 926-1 (which is stored in the telephone management server 906-4). 100), the record whose line number is “CIC-2” is found, and the procedure division field of the record is rewritten to the procedure division “ACM”. The telephone management server 906-4 can also generate an IP packet (including incoming call possibility information) indicating that the ACM packet has been received and notify the media router 903-1 ( Steps A35 to A37, optional).

  On the other hand, when the telephone 905-4 reports that the telephone call is being made to the media router 903-4 following step A25 (step A40), the media router 903-4 sends the transmission source telephone number “TN1” and the destination telephone. The network node sends the IP packet 932 (FIG. 108) including the number “TN2”, the UDP port number “5008” used for voice communication, and the additional information “Info2”. The data is sent to the device 909-1 (step A41). Then, the network node device 909-1 uses the communication record “IA2, IA82, NA2, NA82, MA2, MA82,...” In the first row of the device control table 910-4 (FIG. 123), and the IP packet. 932 is encapsulated to become an IP packet 932-1 (FIG. 109) (step A42), and the proxy telephone server 909-2 becomes an IP packet 932-2 (FIG. 110), which is notified to the telephone management server 909-4. (Step A43).

  ¥ The telephone management server 909-4 extracts the transmission source telephone number “TN1” and the destination telephone number “TN2” from the IP packet 932-2, and calculates the line number “CIC-2” from the two telephone numbers. An IP packet 933 (FIG. 111, CPG packet) indicating that a telephone call is in progress is formed and transmitted to the telephone management server 906-4 (step A44). The IP packet 933 includes a UDP port number “5008” acquired from the IP packet 932-2 and additional information “Info2”. The telephone management server 906-4 extracts the line number “CIC-2”, the procedure classification “CPG”, the UDP port number “5008” and the additional information “Info2” from the IP packet 933, and obtains the CIC management table 926. 1 (FIG. 100), the procedure classification of the record with the line number “CIC-2” is rewritten as “CPG”, and the IP address “EA1, IA1, EA81, IA81”, source telephone from the CIC management table 926-1 The number “TN1” and the destination telephone number “TN2” are read out, and the IP packet 933-1 (FIG. 112) is formed using the read information and transmitted to the proxy telephone server 906-2 (step A45).

  The proxy telephone server 906-2 forms an IP packet 933-2 (FIG. 113) and transmits it to the network node device 906-1 (step A46). The network node device 906-1 transmits the IP packet 933. -2 is decapsulated, and an IP packet 933-3 (FIG. 114) is formed and transmitted to the mediator 903-1 (step A47). The media router 903-1 reads out and holds the telephone numbers “TN1” and “TN2”, the IP address “EA2”, the UDP port number “5008”, and the additional information “Info2” from the IP packet 933-3. The media router 903-1 sends a ringing signal to the telephone 905-1 (step A48).

  Next, when the telephone set 905-4 obtains a response to the telephone call that has been continued after step A40, the response of the destination telephone is transmitted to the media router 903-4 (step A50), and the media router 903-4 sends the response. In order to notify, an IP packet including the source telephone number “TN1” and the destination telephone number “TN2” is transmitted to the telephone management server 909-4 (steps A51 to A53). The format of the IP packet for notifying the response is the same as the format of the IP packet in steps A41 to A43. Note that the media router 903-4 can send back a response confirmation to the response in step A50 to the telephone set 905-4 (step A60, option).

  The telephone management server 909-4 extracts the transmission source telephone number “TN1” and the destination telephone number “TN2” from the received IP packet, and calculates the line number “CIC-2” from the two telephone numbers. An IP packet 934 (FIG. 115) (ANM packet) notifying a response including at least the line number “CIC-2” is formed and transmitted to the telephone management server 906-4 (step A54). 906-4 extracts the line number “CIC-2” and procedure classification “ANM” from the received IP packet 934, and checks the CIC management table 926-1 (FIG. 100) held by the telephone management server 906-4. A record whose line number is “CIC-2” is found, and the procedure section field of the record is rewritten to the procedure section “ANM”.

Next, the telephone management server 906-4 notifies the media router 903-1 that the ANM packet has been received, that is, the telephone 905-4 has answered the telephone call (steps A55, A56, A57). The router 903-1 sends a response signal to the telephone 905-1 (step A58). The telephone 905-1 can return a response confirmation signal in response to the response signal (step A59, option). In steps A45 to A47, a telephone call is notified, and in steps A55 to A57, a response of the destination telephone is notified.
<< Communication Record Settings >>
After step A54, the telephone management server 909-4 receives the IP addresses “EA2”, “EA1”, “from the record whose line number is“ CIC-2 ”from the CIC management table 926-2 (FIG. 103). IA2 "and" IA1 "are extracted and transmitted to the table management server 909-3 (step A64). The table management server 909-3 receives the device control table 910-4 in the network node device 909-1. The record “IA2, IA1, EA2, EA1, MK2, MK1,...” In the third row in FIG. 123 is set (step A65). Here, MK1 = 255.255.255.255 and MK2 = 255.255.255.255. Similarly, after step A55, the telephone management server 906-4 receives the IP addresses “EA1” and “EA2” from the record whose line number is “CIC-2” from the CIC management table 926-1 (FIG. 100). "IA1" and "IA2" are extracted and transmitted to the table management server 906-3 (step A66). The table management server 906-3 is a device control table in the network node device 906-1. It is set as a record “IA1, IA2, EA1, EA2, MK1, MK2,...” In the second row of 910-1 (FIG. 120) (step A67). In steps A64 and A66, sub-tables (such as filter control records) in the respective communication records are also set.
<< communication phase >>
The telephone communication between the telephone 905-1 and the telephone 905-4 is the same step as described in the other embodiments, and the device control table 910-1 set in the connection phase (FIG. 120). Communication record “IA1, IA2, EA1, EA2, MK1, MK2,... "IA2, IA1, EA2, EA1, MK2, MK1, ...") are used. The voice of the telephone 905-1 is digitized and placed on the payload of the IP packet 935 (FIG. 116). Here, the acquired destination address and UDP port number are used. That is, the source address is the IP address “EA1” of the mediator 903-1 and the destination address is the IP address “EA2” of the media router 903-4 to which the destination telephone 905-4 is connected. “5006” is used as the UDP port number, and “5008” is used as the destination UDP port number. An analog voice is sent from the telephone 905-1 (step A68-1), and the voice is digitized by the media router 903-1 to become a voice IP packet 935 and sent to the network node device 906-1 (step A68-1). A68-2). The IP packet 936 (FIG. 117) is encapsulated here and reaches the network node device 909-1 via the routers 911-4 to 911-6 of FIG. 92 via the IP communication line (step A68-). 3) Here, it is decapsulated and reaches the media router 903-4 (step A68-4), is converted back to analog voice and reaches the telephone set 905-4 (step A68-5). The analog voice sent from the telephone set 905-4 is digitized and included in the IP packet, and sent in the reverse direction (steps A69-1 to A69-5).

To summarize the above-described IP encapsulation, an external packet is input from a logical terminal of a communication line outside the IP network 900, and the input logical terminal identification information of the input side, a source external IP address and a destination external IP address in the external packet are input. Are determined, the incoming internal address of the transfer destination of the internal packet is determined based on the management of the communication record of the device control table, and the internal packet is transferred inside the communication network. In other words, an internal communication line to which internal packets are transferred is determined between the network node device on the transmission side and the reception side. The internal packet is transferred inside the communication network and restored to the external packet in the network node device on the receiving side. It is also possible to employ an internal packet format that uses two sets of the input logical terminal identification information of the input side and the destination external IP address in the external packet and does not use the source external IP address in the external packet.
<< Liberation Phase >>
When the user of the telephone 905-1 notifies the release of the telephone communication (step A70 in FIG. 93), it passes through the media router 903-1, the network node device 906-1, and the proxy telephone server 906-2. The telephone management server 906-4 is notified (steps A70 to A73), and the telephone management server 906-4 has the line number “CIC-2” in the CIC management table 926-1 (FIG. 100). The end time “Ed-1” is written in the record end time column. Next, a release IP packet 937 (FIG. 118) (REL packet) is formed and notified to the telephone management server 909-4 (step A74), and the telephone management server 906-4 sends a release instruction to the proxy telephone. The media router 903-1 is notified via the server 906-2 and the network node device 906-1 (steps A85 to A87). When the media router 903-1 receives the release notification in step A70, the media router 903-1 can also send a disconnection confirmation to the telephone 905-1 (step A70-1, option).

  When the telephone management server 909-4 receives the IP packet 937 (step A74), the telephone management server 909-4 sets the end time of the record whose line number is “CIC-2” in the CIC management table 926-2 (FIG. 103). An end time “Ed-2” is written in the field, and in order to report that the release IP packet 937 has been received, a release completion IP packet 938 (FIG. 119) (RLC packet) is formed, and the telephone management server 906 is formed. -4 is returned (step A84). Further, the telephone management server 909-4 sends a telephone communication release instruction to the media router 903-4 via the proxy telephone server 909-2 and the network node device 909-1 (steps A76 to A78).

The media router 903-4 notifies the telephone 905-4 of a disconnection instruction for the release instruction (step A79), and a release report for the release instruction is sent via the proxy telephone server to the telephone management server 909-4. (Steps A81 to A83). The telephone set 905-4 can return a disconnection instruction confirmation in response to the disconnection instruction sent from the media router 903-4 (step A80, option), and the media router 903-4 further performs the disconnection instruction confirmation. It is also possible to send a confirmation (step A80-1, optional).
<< Deletion of communication record >>
After step A74, the telephone management server 906-4 transmits the line number “CIC-2” in the IP packet 937 to the table management server 906-3 (step A96), and the table management server 906-3 The communication record, in this case, the record “IA1, IA2, EA1, EA2, MK1, MK2” in the second row of the device control table 910-1 (FIG. 120) is deleted (step A97). After step A74, the telephone management server 909-4 transmits the line number “CIC-2” in the received release IP packet 937 to the table management server 909-3 (step A98) and the table management server 909. −3 deletes the communication record, in this case the record “IA2, IA1, EA2, EA1, MK2, MK1” in the third row of the device control table 910-4 (FIG. 123) (step A99).
<< Post-processing of restriction on number of calls and number of calls >>
After step A74, the telephone management server 906-4 subtracts “1” from the number of lines in use corresponding to the address “EA1” written in the call management table 918-1 (FIG. 124). Similarly, after step A84, the telephone management server 909-4 subtracts “1” from the number of lines in use corresponding to the address “EA2” written in the incoming call management table 918-2 (FIG. 125).
<< Call information collection >>
In the communication case 1 described above, the operation management server 915 (FIG. 92) exchanges information with the telephone management servers 906-4 and 909-4 (steps A100 and A101 in FIG. 126), and the CIC management table 926- 1 (Fig. 100) and 926-2 (Fig. 103), for example, telephone communication records such as source telephone number, destination telephone number, start time, end time, etc. It can be provided for purposes. Further, the operation management server 915 exchanges information with the table management servers 906-3 and 909-3 (steps A102 and A103), and the communication within the device control tables 910-1 (in FIG. 92) and 910-4. The information described in the record can be obtained and provided for the purpose of operating the IP network 900 or charging for telephone communication.
<< About setting method of communication record >>
For example, a media router 903-1 and a proxy telephone server 906-2 such as a communication record “IA1, IA81, NA1, NA81, MA1, MA81,...” In the first row of the device control table 910-1 (FIG. 120) A communication record (communication record used for inter-terminal communication connection control) used for IP packet transmission / reception between the terminals is set in advance before the inter-terminal communication is performed. Used to transmit / receive media between terminals such as the communication record “IA1, IA2, EA1, EA2, MK1, MK2,...” On the second line of the device control table 910-1, and for inter-terminal communication connection control. The communication record that does not exist is dynamically set or deleted via the table management server as described above. Note that the communication record set in advance and the communication record set dynamically are set in different areas of the network node device memory to simplify the memory mounting. The same applies to communication cases 2 to 6 described later.
<< Phone number registration for fixed telephones >>
The fixed telephone registration method and the setting of the communication record of the capsule control table in the communication case 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 192. FIG.

  The user 990-1 of the fixed telephone 905-1 determines the external IP address “EA1” and the telephone number “TN1” of the fixed telephone 905-1 in accordance with the operation rule of the IP network 900 or in consultation with the communication carrier. At least a user name and a communication fee payment method are applied to the telephone receptionist 991-1 for use of the fixed telephone 905-1 (step P1 in FIG. 192). The telephone receptionist 991-1 receives the identification symbol N903-1 of the media router to which the fixed telephone 905-1 is connected, the identification symbol N906-1 of the network node device 906-1, and the identification symbol N917-1 of the communication line 917-1. The reception work material held by the telephone receptionist 991-1 is checked, and the identifiable information of the media router 903-1 to which the fixed telephone 905-1 is connected is notified to the user 990-1. The user 990-1 sets the external IP address “EA1” to the fixed telephone 905-1.

  In the case where the external IP address “EA1” is set in the media router 903-1, the telephone acceptor 991-1 notifies the user 990-1 of the external IP address “EA1”. The user 990-1 sets the telephone number “TN1” in the fixed telephone 905-1. Through the above procedure, the telephone acceptor 991-1 receives the external IP address “EA1”, the telephone number “TN1”, the user name, the communication fee payment method, the network node device 906-1 identification symbol N906-1, the media router The reception information including at least the identification symbol N903-1 and the identification symbol N917-1 of the communication line 917-1 is acquired.

Next, the acceptor 991-1 notifies the acceptance information to the user service server 992-1 (step P2). The user service server 992-1 uses the network node device identification symbol N906-1 and the communication line identification symbol N917-1 included in the reception information to assign an internal IP address held in the user service server 992-1. In accordance with the rule material, the internal IP address “IA1” is determined and added to the reception information, and the reception information including the internal IP address “IA1” is held in the database (step P3). Next, the user service server 992-1 includes at least an external IP address “EA1”, an internal IP address “IA1”, a telephone number “TN1”, an identification symbol N906-1 of the network node device 906-1, and a telephone number “TN1”. The identification symbol N903-1 of the media router 903-1 concerned, the identification symbol N917-1 of the communication line 917-1, the UNI of the media router 903-1, and the proxy telephone server 906-2 for exchanging information with the media router 903-1 The telephone management server 906-4 is notified of the external address “EA81” and the internal address “IA81” of the telephone and the internal address “IA91” of the telephone management server 906-4 that exchanges information with the proxy telephone server 906-2 (step P4). ). The telephone management server 906-4 notifies the telephone number server 906-5 of at least the external IP address “EA1”, the internal IP address “IA1”, and the telephone number “TN1” among the acquired reception information (Step P5). The number server 906-5 stores at least the external IP address “EA1”, the internal IP address “IA1”, and the telephone number “TN1” in the acquired information, for example, data storage of a domain name server defined in RFC1996 or RFC1035. Depending on the format, it is held inside (step P6). The telephone number server 906-5 notifies the higher-order telephone number server 995 that the telephone number server 906-5 holds the telephone number “TN1” together with the identification symbol N906-1 and the IP address of the telephone number server 906-5 (step P7). The telephone number server 995 holds therein at least a set of the identification symbol N906-1 of the telephone number server 906-5, the IP address, and the telephone number “TN1” (step P8). The upper telephone number server 995 holds the identification symbol and IP address of another telephone number server that holds the telephone number “TN-x”.
<< Variation >>
Steps P5 to P8 (FIG. 192) can be changed to the following steps P5x to P8x. The telephone management server 906-4 transmits at least the external IP address “EA1”, the internal IP address “IA1”, and the telephone number “TN1” from the acquired reception information via the upper telephone number server 995 (step P5x). The telephone number server 906-5 is notified (step P6x), and the telephone number server 906-5 holds the received external IP address “EA1”, internal IP address “IA1”, and telephone number “TN1” therein. Here, the upper telephone number server 995 holds the identification symbol and IP address of the other telephone number server 906-5 that holds the telephone number “TN-x”. Further, the telephone number server 906-5 can report the result (step P7x, step P8x).

Further, the user service server 991-1 requests the upper telephone number server 995 to rewrite or delete the contents of the upper telephone number server 995 via the telephone management server 906-4 or directly. You can also. The user service server 991-1 can also hold multicast reception authentication information (optional).
<< Information exchange function between telephone number servers >>
FIG. 193 shows that the upper telephone number server 995 and the lower telephone number servers 906-5, 907-5, 908-5, and 909-5 in the IP network 900 can exchange information with each other. . Further, the lower telephone number servers 906-5, 907-5, 908-5, and 909-5 can exchange information via the upper telephone number server 995. For example, when the telephone number server 907-5 queries the telephone number server 995 about the external IP address and the internal IP address associated with the telephone number “TN1” (step P20 in FIG. 194), the telephone number server 995 calls the telephone number “TN1”. The telephone management server 906-5 that holds the IP address associated with the internal IP address (step P21), and acquires the external IP address “EA1” and the internal IP address “IA1” (step P22). Next, the telephone number server 995 notifies the telephone number server 907-5 of the obtained external IP address “EA1” and internal IP address “IA1” associated with the telephone number “TN1” (step P23). The upper telephone number server 995 holds the identification code, IP address, and multicast reception authentication information (option) of the lower telephone number server that holds the telephone number “TN-x” and the telephone number “TN-x”. In addition, the mobile phone is characterized by holding terminal authentication information as will be described later.
<< Communication Case 2: Communication between Mobile Phone and Mobile Phone >>
127 and 128 are diagrams for explaining telephone communication from the mobile telephone 905-6 to the mobile telephone 905-8. The telephone number of the telephone 905-6 is “TN3”, and the telephone number of the telephone 905-8 is “TN4”. ". Here, the wireless base station 902-3 includes the external IP address “EB1”, the wireless base station 902-4 includes the external IP address “EB2”, and the internal IP address “IB1” is at the end of the communication line 917-3. The internal IP address “IB2” is assigned to the end of the communication line 917-4. The proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 is assigned an external IP address “EB81” and an internal IP address “IB81”, and the telephone management server 908-4 is assigned an internal IP address “IB91”. The telephone number server 908-5 is assigned an internal IP address “IB96”, the proxy mobile telephone server 909-6 is assigned an internal IP address “IB82”, and the telephone management server 909-4 is assigned an internal IP address “IA92”. . The external IP addresses of the telephone number servers 906-5 to 909-5 are all “EA81”, and the external IP addresses of the proxy mobile telephone servers 906-6 to 909-6 are all “EB81”.
<< Connection Phase >>
When a call connection request is transmitted from the telephone set 905-6 via the radio communication line 917-5, a radio channel connection request signal is transmitted to the radio base station 902-3 (step B01), and the radio base station 902-3 calls the telephone set. A call connection request acceptance for the call connection request is returned to 905-6 (step B02). Next, the telephone set 905-6 sends a call setting request including the transmission source telephone number “TN3” and the destination telephone number “TN4” to the wireless base station 902-3 (step B03), and the wireless base station 902-3. Is based on the content of the received call setting request, the source IP address is “EB1”, the destination IP address “EB81”, the source telephone number “TN3”, the destination telephone number “TN4”, the radio base station 902-3 Forms an IP packet 920B (FIG. 129) including a call setting request composed of a port number “5006” and additional information “Info3” used for telephone voice transmission, and transmits the packet to the network node device 908-1 (see FIG. Step B04).

The network node device 908-1 applies the record in the first row of the device control table 910-3 (FIG. 122), encapsulates the IP packet 920B to form an internal packet 921B (FIG. 130), The data is transmitted to proxy mobile phone server 908-6 (step B05). The proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 forms an IP packet 922B (FIG. 131) based on the IP packet 921B and transmits it to the telephone management server 908-4 (step B06).
<< Line number management >>
Next, the telephone management server 908-4 calculates the line number “CIC-3” from the combination of the source telephone number “TN3” and the destination telephone number “TN4” using the contents of the IP packet 922B (FIG. 131). Then, the CIC management table 923B (FIG. 132) is formed. Further, the telephone management server 908-4 shows the destination telephone number “TN4” and the IP packet 924B (FIG. 133) including a question regarding the transmission source telephone number “TN3” in the telephone number server 908-5 ( In step B07), an IP packet 925B (FIG. 134) including an answer to the question is received (step B08). The telephone management server 908-4 adds the acquired addresses and the UNI interface “UNI3” of the radio base station 902-3 to the CIC management table 923B (FIG. 132). This result is shown in the first line record of the CIC management table 926-1B (FIG. 135). When the telephone management server 908-4 transmits / receives IP packets to / from the radio base station 902-3 thereafter, the telephone management server 908-4 performs communication procedures (steps B09, B16, B17, B35, B45, B55, B73, B85, etc.) are used.

  Next, the telephone management server 908-4 forms an IP packet 939B09 (FIG. 136) including the call setting acceptance, the authentication request, the telephone numbers “TN3” and “TN4”, and the proxy mobile telephone server. The data is sent to the bar 908-6 (step B09). The proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 forms an IP packet 939B10 (FIG. 137) and transmits it to the network node device 908-1 (step B10). The network node device 908-1 transmits the IP packet 939B10. After decapsulating and forming IP packet 939B11 (FIG. 138), IP packet 939B11 is transmitted to radio base station 902-3 (step B11). Based on the information included in the received IP packet 939B11, the base station 902-3 notifies the telephone set 905-6 of a call setting acceptance and authentication request via the wireless communication path 917-5 (step B12).

  The telephone set 905-6 transmits an authentication response (password or the like) indicating terminal validity to the wireless base station 902-3 via the wireless communication path 917-5 (step B13). The wireless base station 902-3 forms an IP packet 939 B 14 (FIG. 139) including an authentication reply, sends it to the network node device 908-1 (step B 14), and is obtained by being encapsulated in the network node device 908-1. A new IP packet 939B15 (FIG. 140) including the answer reaches the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 (step B15). Next, a new IP packet 939B16 (FIG. 141) including an authentication reply reaches the telephone management server 908-4 (step B16).

The telephone management server 908-4 sends an IP packet including terminal authentication pass / fail for the communication channel setting instruction to the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 (step B17). The new IP packet including the terminal authentication pass / fail arrives at the network node device 908-1 and is decapsulated (step B18), and reaches the base station 902-3 (step B19). The base transceiver station 902-3 notifies the terminal 9055-6 of the pass / fail of IP packet authentication via the wireless communication path 917-5 (step B20). The format of the IP packet transferred in steps B17 to B19 is the same as the format of the IP packet transferred in steps B09 to B11 and the address storage format. Next, the telephone management server 908-4 refers to the IP address information in the CIC management table 926-1B (FIG. 135) and refers to the packet 922B (FIG. 131) to make an IP packet for making a call setting request. 927B (FIG. 142) (IAM packet) is formed, and the IP packet 927B is transmitted to the telephone management server 909-4 (step B21).
<< Line number management >>
When the telephone management server 909-4 receives the IP packet 927B, the line number “CIC-3”, procedure classification “IAM”, source telephone number “TN3”, destination telephone number “TN4” included in the payload are received. ", A plurality of IP addresses and UNI interface" UNI4 "are taken out and written and recorded as a record of the CIC management table 926-2B (FIG. 143). This write time “St-4” is also written.

  Next, the telephone management server 909-4 forms an IP packet 928B (FIG. 144) including a call setting request using the received IP packet 927B, and the IP packet 928B is used as the proxy mobile telephone server 909-. 6 (step B22). The proxy mobile telephone server 909-6 forms an IP packet 929B (FIG. 145) and transmits it to the network node device 909-1 (step B23). The network node device 909-1 decapsulates the received IP packet 929B to form an IP packet 930B (FIG. 146), and then transmits the IP packet 930B to the radio base station 902-4 (step B24). Based on the received IP packet 930B, the base station 902-4 temporarily notifies the telephone call 905-8 via the wireless communication path 917-6 (step B25).

  Upon receiving the telephone call provisional notification (step B25), the telephone set 905-8 reports the state of the wireless communication path 917-6 (noise, voice quality, etc.) to the wireless base station 902-4 (step B26), and then the terminal Information (such as a password) signifying validity is sent to the wireless base station 902-4 via the wireless communication path 917-6 (step B27a). The radio base station 902-4 forms an IP packet 939B27B (FIG. 147) including information indicating terminal validity and sends it to the network node device 909-1 (step B27b). The IP packet 939B27B is encapsulated in the network node device 909-1 to become an IP packet 939B27C (FIG. 148). The IP packet 939B27C reaches the proxy mobile telephone server 909-6 (step B27c), and the IP packet 939B27D (FIG. 149). ) To reach the telephone management server 909-4 (step B27d).

  The telephone management server 909-4 sends an IP packet 939B28A (FIG. 150) including the terminal authentication pass / fail for the communication channel setting instruction to the proxy mobile telephone server 909-6 (step B28a), and the proxy mobile telephone server 909- 6 becomes an IP packet 939B28B (FIG. 151), and the IP packet 939B28B reaches the network node device 909-1 (step B28b). The IP packet 939B28B is decapsulated into an IP packet 939B28C (FIG. 152), and reaches the base station 902-4 (step B28c). The radio base station 902-4 notifies the telephone set 905-8 of information including the pass / fail of the IP packet terminal authentication via the radio communication path 917-6 (step B28d). Next, the radio base station 902-4 checks whether the destination telephone number “TN4” can be received and notifies the telephone set 905-8 of the call (incoming call) (step B30). The radio base station 902-4 holds the contents of the IP packet 930B, that is, the telephone numbers “TN3” and “TN4”, the address “EB1”, the port number “5006”, and “Info3”. Next, the radio base station 902-4 generates an IP packet including the telephone numbers “TN3” and “TN4” and an incoming / outgoing report report, and notifies the telephone management server 909-4 (steps B31 through B31). B33). The telephone management server 909-4 extracts the transmission source telephone number “TN3”, the destination telephone number “TN4”, and the incoming / outgoing report information from the received IP packet. Then, the line number “CIC-3” is calculated from the two telephone numbers, and the IP packet 931B (FIG. 153) (ACM packet) including the line number “CIC-3” and information on the possibility of incoming calls of the telephone set 905-8. Is transmitted to the telephone management server 908-4 (step B34). The telephone management server 908-4 extracts the line number “CIC-3” and the procedure classification “ACM” from the received IP packet 931B, checks the CIC management table 926-1B (FIG. 135), and the line number is “CIC”. -3 "is found, and the procedure division is rewritten to" ACM ". Next, the telephone management server 908-4 can generate an IP packet indicating that the ACM packet has been received and notify the radio base station 902-3 (steps B35 to B37, option).

  When the radio base station 902-4 receives a telephone call from the telephone set 905-8 (step B40), the transmission source telephone number “TN3” and the destination telephone number “TN4” and the port used by the telephone set 905-8 for voice transmission. The IP packet 932B (FIG. 154) including the network number “5008” and the additional information “Info4” is formed and transmitted to the network node device 909-1 (step B41). The network node device 909-1 encapsulates the IP packet 932B, forms an IP packet 932-1B (FIG. 155), and transmits it to the proxy mobile telephone server 909-6 (step B42). The proxy mobile telephone server 909-6 forms an IP packet 932-2B (FIG. 156) and transmits it to the telephone management server 909-4 (step B43). The telephone management server 909-4 extracts the telephone numbers “TN3” and “TN4” from the received IP packet 932-2B, calculates the line number “CIC-3” from the two telephone numbers, and makes a telephone call An IP packet 933B (FIG. 157) (CPG packet) indicating the inside is formed and transmitted to the telephone management server 908-4 (step B44). The telephone management server 908-4 extracts the line number “CIC-3”, the procedure classification “CPG”, the UDP port number “5008”, and the additional information “Info4” from the received IP packet 933B, and obtains the CIC management table 926. -1B (FIG. 135), the procedure section of the record with the line number “CIC-3” is rewritten as “CPG”, the IP address “EB1, IB1, EB81, IB81”, the source telephone number “TN3”, the destination The telephone number “TN4” is read out, and the IP packet 933-1B (FIG. 158) is formed using the acquired information and transmitted to the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 (step B45).

  The proxy telephone server 908-2 uses the received IP packet 933-1B to form an IP packet 933-2B (FIG. 159) and transmits it to the network node device 908-1 (step B46). The node device 908-1 decapsulates the received IP packet 933-2B, forms an IP packet 933-3B (FIG. 160), and transmits it to the radio base station 902-3 (step B47). The radio base station 902-3 receives the telephone number “TN3” and the telephone number “TN4”, the IP address “EB2”, the port number “5008”, and the additional information “Info4” included in the received IP packet 933-3B. Is read and held. The radio base station 902-3 notifies the telephone 905-6 that the destination telephone 905-8 is being called (step B48).

  Next, the telephone set 905-8 responds to the call (step B50), and the radio base station 902-4 notifies the answer by telephone management of IP packets including the source telephone number “TN3” and the destination telephone number “TN4”. Transmit to server 909-4 (steps B51 to B53). The telephone management server 909-4 extracts the source telephone number “TN3” and the destination telephone number “TN4” from the received IP packet, and calculates the line number “CIC-3” from the two telephone numbers. Then, an IP packet 934B (FIG. 161) (ANM packet) notifying a response including at least the line number “CIC-3” is formed and transmitted to the telephone management server 908-4 (step B54). The telephone management server 909-4 can also return a response confirmation to the radio base station (steps B60-1 to B60-4, option).

The telephone management server 908-4 extracts the line number “CIC-3” and the procedure classification “ANM” from the received IP packet 934B, and the CIC management table 926-1B (held by the telephone management server 908-4). 135), the record having the line number “CIC-3” is found, and the procedure division field of the record is rewritten to the procedure division “ANM”. Next, the telephone management server 908-4 confirms that the telephone set 905-8 has answered the telephone call, via the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 and the network node device 908-1, to the radio base station. 902-3 is notified (step B55 to step B57). The radio base station 902-3 sends a calling signal to the telephone set 905-6 (step B58). The telephone set 905-6 can also send back a response confirmation (step B59, option).
<< Communication Record Settings >>
The telephone management server 909-4 refers to the CIC management table 926-2B (FIG. 143), acquires communication record change information, and transmits it to the table management server 909-3 (step B64). The management server 909-3 is a record “IB2, IB1, EB2, EB1, MK5, MK6,... In the fourth row of the device control table 910-4 (FIG. 123) in the network node device 909-1. "(Step B65). Here, the mask information MK5 and MK6 is 255.255.255.255. Similarly, the telephone management server 908-4 refers to the CIC management table 926-1B (FIG. 135), acquires communication record change information, and transmits it to the table management server 908-3 (step B66). ), The table management server 908-3 is the record “IB1, IB2, EB1, EB2, MK6” in the third row of the device control table 910-3 (FIG. 122) inside the network node device 908-1. MK5,... "Is set (step B67).
<< communication phase >>
The telephone communication between the telephone set 905-6 and the telephone set 905-8 is the same step as described in the other embodiments, and the record “IB1, IB2” in the third row of the device control table 910-3 is used. , EB1, EB2, MK6, MK5,..., And the record “IB2, IB1, EB2, EB1, MK5, MK6,. The voice of the telephone 905-6 is digitized and placed on the payload of the IP packet 935B (FIG. 162). Here, the destination address and UDP port number obtained in the connection phase are used. Voice is transferred from the telephone set 905-6 in the form of a radio communication radio wave via the radio communication path 917-5 (step B68-1), and the voice is digitized by the radio base station 902-3 to obtain a voice IP bucket 935B. (FIG. 162), and is sent to the network node device 908-1 (step B68-2) and encapsulated into an IP packet 936B (FIG. 163). Furthermore, it reaches the network node device 909-1 via the router 911-6 (FIG. 92) and the communication line 913-5 (step B68-3), and is decapsulated by the network node device 909-1. The wireless base station 902-4 is reached (step B68-4), and the voice returned to the analog voice is transmitted through the wireless communication path 917-6 in the form of radio communication radio waves and reaches the telephone set 905-8 ( Step B68-5). The analog voice sent from the telephone set 905-8 is digitized, stored in an IP packet, and sent in the reverse direction (steps B69-1 to B69-5). In steps B68-1, B68-5, B69-1, and B69-5, the digitized voice may be transmitted through the wireless communication paths 917-5 and 917-6.
<< Liberation Phase >>
When the user of the telephone set 905-6 notifies the release of the telephone communication (step B70 in FIG. 128), it passes through the radio base station 902-3, the network node device 908-1, and the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6. The telephone management server 908-4 is notified (steps B70 to B73), and the telephone management server 908-4 has the line number "CIC-3" in the CIC management table 926-1B (FIG. 135). The end time “Ed-1” is written in the end time column of the record “”. Next, a release IP packet 937B (FIG. 164, REL packet) is formed and notified to the telephone management server 909-4 (step B74). The telephone management server 909-4 issues a telephone communication release instruction. The wireless base station 902-4 is notified via the proxy mobile telephone server 909-6 (steps B76 to B78). Furthermore, the telephone management server 909-4 displays the end time “Ed-2” in the end time column of the record whose line number is “CIC-3” in the CIC management table 926-2B (FIG. 143). In order to report that the release IP packet 937B has been received, a release completion IP packet 938B (FIG. 165, RLC packet) is formed and returned to the telephone management server 908-4 (step B84).

Upon receiving step B84, the telephone management server 908-4 notifies the radio base station 902-3 of a release instruction via the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 and the network node device 908-1 (step S84). B85 to B87). The wireless base station 902-3 can also notify the telephone set 905-6 of a disconnection instruction via the wireless communication path 917-5 (step B70-1, option). The radio base station 902-4 notifies the telephone set 905-8 of a disconnection instruction (step B79), and notifies the telephone management server 909-4 of a release report via the proxy mobile telephone server 909-6 ( Steps B81 to B83). The telephone set 905-8 can also transmit a disconnection instruction confirmation signal to the radio base station 902-4 (step B80, option).
<< Deletion of communication record >>
After step B73, the telephone management server 908-4 transmits the line number “CIC-3” written in the release IP packet 937B to the table management server 908-3 (step B96). The server 908-3 deletes the corresponding communication record, in this case the record “IB1, IB2, EB1, EB2, MK6, MK5,...” In the third row of the device control table 910-3 (FIG. 122). (Step B97). Similarly, after step B76, the telephone management server 909-4 extracts the line number “CIC-3” in the received IP packet 937B and transmits it to the table management server 909-3 (step B98). The table management server 909-3 is a corresponding communication record, in this case the record “IB2, IB1, EB2, EB1, MK5, MK6,...” In the fourth row of the device control table 910-4 (FIG. 123). Is deleted (step B99).
<< Release Report Option and Radio Channel Disconnect >>
When the telephone management server 909-4 receives the release report (step B83), the telephone management server 909-4 can send the release report confirmation IP packet, and the release report confirmation IP packet passes through the proxy mobile telephone server 909-6. Further, the wireless base station 902-4 is reached via the network node device 909-1 (steps B90a to B90c). Furthermore, the telephone management server 909-4 can transmit an IP packet including a radio channel disconnection signal, and the IP packet including the radio channel disconnection signal passes through the proxy mobile telephone server 909-6 and then through the network node device 909-1. And reaches the base station 902-4 (steps B91a to B91c). When the wireless base station 902-4 sends an IP packet including a wireless channel disconnection confirmation signal to the network node device 909-1, the IP packet passes through the network node device 909-1 and then passes through the proxy mobile telephone server 909-6. Then, the telephone management server 909-4 is reached (steps B92a to B92c). The steps B90a to B90c, B91a to B91c, and steps B92a to B92c are options that can be omitted.

Similarly, when step B85 is completed, the telephone management server 908-4 sends an IP packet including a radio channel disconnection signal to the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6, and the IP packet is transmitted to the base station via the network node device 908-1. The station 902-3 is reached (steps B88a to B88c). The radio base station 902-3 notifies the radio channel disconnection signal extracted from the IP packet to the telephone set 905-6 via the radio communication path 917-5 (FIG. 92) (step B88d). The telephone set 905-6 transmits a radio channel disconnection confirmation signal to the radio base station 902-3 via the radio communication path 917-6 (step B89a). The radio base station 902-3 arrives at the telephone management server 908-4 via the network node device 908-1 and the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 with the IP packet including the radio channel disconnection confirmation signal (step B89c). To B89d). Steps B88a to B88d and Steps B89a to B89d are optional options.
<< Collection of number of calls and billing information >>
In the telephone communication of the communication case 2 described above, the number of outgoing calls, the number of incoming calls are restricted, information is collected from the CIC management table and the device control table by the same procedure as the telephone communication in the communication case 1, and the IP It is possible to perform processing related to operation of the network 900 and billing.
<< Mobile phone number registration >>
The registration method of the mobile telephone and the setting of the communication record of the device control table in the communication case 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 195.

  The user 990-2 of the mobile telephone 905-6 determines an external IP address “EB1” and a telephone number “TN3” used by the mobile telephone 905-6 in accordance with the operation rules of the IP network 900 or in consultation with a communication carrier. At least including the user name and communication fee payment method, the telephone receptionist 991-2 applies for the use of the mobile telephone 905-6, and the telephone receptionist 991-2 gives the terminal authentication information “PID3” to perform proxy movement. The external IP address “EB81” of the telephone server is notified to the user 990-2 (step Q1 in FIG. 195). The external addresses of the proxy mobile phone servers 906-6, 907-6, 908-6, and 909-6 have a common value “EB81”. Further, the second terminal authentication information “PID-M” can include multicast reception authentication information including a multicast service identification symbol, a reception permission password thereof, an external address “WA9” of the multicast authentication server, and the like.

  Here, the terminal authentication information “PID3” is given to the combination of the external IP address “EB1” and the telephone number “TN3”, and is treated as a secret value and not disclosed to a third party other than the user 990-2. . The user 990-2 has a telephone number “TN3”, an external IP address “EB1”, terminal authentication information “PID3”, an external IP address “EB81” of the proxy mobile phone server, and second terminal authentication information “PID-M” ( Option) is set in the mobile telephone 905-6. Then, the acceptor 991-2 notifies the acceptance information to the user service server 992-2 (step Q2). The user service server 992-2 holds the reception information in the database (step Q3).

  Next, the user service server 992-2 notifies the telephone management server 909-4 of at least the telephone number “TN3” and the terminal authentication information “PID3” (step Q4). Here, the user service server 992-2 selects the telephone management server 909-4 according to the operation rule of the IP network 900 (for example, selecting a telephone management server that is geographically close). The telephone management server 909-4 notifies at least the telephone number “TN3” and the terminal authentication information “PID3” to the telephone number server 909-5 (step Q5). The telephone number server 995 is notified (step Q6), and the telephone number server 995 holds at least the telephone number “TN3” and the terminal authentication information “PID3” therein (step Q7).

Furthermore, the multicast reception authentication information can be held (optional). The user service server 992-2 may request the upper telephone number server 995 to rewrite or delete the contents of the upper telephone number server 995 via the telephone management server 906-4 or directly. it can.
<< Variation >>
The steps Q5 to Q7 can be changed to the next step Q5x. That is, the telephone management server 909-4 notifies at least the telephone number “TN3” and the terminal authentication information “PID3” to the upper telephone number server 995 (step Q5x), and the telephone number server 995 receives the received telephone number “99”. TN3 ”and terminal authentication information“ PID3 ”are held inside.
<< Registration of initial position of mobile phone >>
A method by which the mobile telephone 905-6 registers its position in the IP network 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 195. A case will be described in which the mobile telephone 905-6 transmits a radio wave information report including a location registration request and happens to be connected to the radio base station 902-3 via the radio communication line 917-5 (FIG. 92).

The radio base station 902-3 exchanges information with the mobile phone 905-6 to confirm the communication possibility (step Q10). This confirmation procedure is performed by communication layers 1 and 2, and need not be performed by communication layer 3. When the communication possibility is confirmed, the mobile telephone 905-6 transmits location registration request information (step Q11 in FIG. 195). The location registration request information includes a telephone number “TN3” used by the mobile telephone 905-6, terminal authentication information “PID3”, an external IP address “EB1”, and an external IP address “EB81” of the proxy mobile telephone server. As a variation, instead of the terminal authentication information “PID3”, ciphertext C3 is generated using “PID3” as an encryption key and telephone number “TN3” as plain text, and an external IP address “EB1”, telephone number “TN3”, and A known authentication technique using the ciphertext C3 can also be used. In this way, the secret terminal authentication information “PID3” is a wireless communication line. The wireless base station 902-3 can receive the telephone number “TN3”, the external IP address “EB1”, the terminal authentication information “PID3” An external packet 997-1 (FIG. 196) including the ciphertext C3 is formed and transmitted to the proxy mobile phone server 908-6. Here, the source external IP address of the external packet 997-1 is “EB1”, and the destination external IP address is “EB81”. When the external packet 997-1 arrives at the network node device 908-1 (step Q12), the record “IB1, IW81, K-zero, EB81, M− in the fourth row of the capsule control table 910-3 (FIG. 122). .. ”are used to form an internal packet 997-2 (FIG. 197), and the internal packet 997-2 is sent to the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 (step Q13). Here, “IW81” is an internal IP address of the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6, and “M-one” is an address mask whose values are all “1”. The proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 receives the internal packet 997-2, further forms an internal packet including the internal IP address “IB1” included in the header portion of the internal packet 997-2, and sends it to the telephone number server 908-5. Transmit (step Q14). The telephone number server 908-5 receives the telephone number “TN3”, the external IP address “EB1”, the internal IP address “IB1”, the terminal authentication information “PID3” or the ciphertext “C3” from the received internal packet. Is stored in the data storage format (step Q15). Next, the acquired telephone number “TN3”, terminal authentication information “PID3”, and the identification code of the telephone number server 908-5 are notified to the upper telephone number server 995 (step Q16). The telephone number server 995 stores the telephone number “TN3” and the terminal authentication information “PID3” held in Step Q7 of telephone number registration, the telephone number “TN3” and the terminal authentication information “PID3” acquired in Step Q16, and Are compared to determine whether the terminal authentication result is pass or fail. In the case where the ciphertext C3 is sent instead of the terminal authentication information “PID3”, the ciphertext C3 ”is generated by using“ PID3 ”as an encryption key and the telephone number“ TN3 ”as plaintext, and the received ciphertext C3 and A check is made as to whether or not the generated ciphertext C3 ″ matches, and if it matches, a known communication partner authentication technique is used in which it is determined to pass.

The upper telephone number server 995 reports the terminal authentication result to the telephone number server 908-5 (step Q20). When the terminal authentication result fails, the telephone number server 908-5 discards the telephone number “TN3” and the terminal authentication information “PID3” held in step Q15 (step Q21). The telephone number server 908-5 reports the terminal authentication result to the mobile telephone 905-6 via the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6, the network node device 908-1, and the radio base station 902-3 (Steps Q22 to Q25). ).
<< Mobile phone position change >>
In a state where the initial location registration of the mobile phone has been completed, the mobile phone 905-6 changes the location where the mobile phone 905-6 connects to the radio base station 902-3 via the radio communication line 917-5, and includes a location change request. A case will be described in which wireless radio wave information is transmitted and happens to be connected to the wireless base station 902-4 via the wireless communication line 917-7 (FIG. 92). In order to simplify the explanation, a case where the mobile telephone 905-6 is switched to the mobile telephone 905-6x will be described (FIG. 92).

  The radio base station 902-4 exchanges information with the mobile phone 905-6x to confirm the communication possibility (step Q10x in FIG. 198), and the mobile phone 905-6x transmits location registration request information (step Q11x). The location registration request information includes a telephone number “TN3” used by the mobile telephone 905-6x, terminal authentication information “PID3”, the external IP address “EB1”, and an external IP address “EB81” of the proxy mobile telephone server. Radio base station 902-4 forms an external packet similar to external packet 997-1 (FIG. 196) including telephone number “TN3”, external IP address “EB1”, and terminal authentication information “PID3” included in the received information. To the proxy mobile phone server 909-6. Here, the source external IP address “EB1” and the destination external IP address “EB81” of the external packet. When the external packet reaches the network node device 909-1 (step Q12x), the records “IB2, IB84, K-zero, EB81, M-zero, M in the fifth row of the capsule control table 910-4 (FIG. 123). -one, ... "is used to form an internal packet similar to the internal packet 997-2 (FIG. 197), and the internal packet is sent to the proxy mobile telephone server 909-6 (step Q13x). The proxy mobile telephone server 909-6 receives the internal packet, further forms a new internal packet including the internal IP address “IB2” included in the header part of the internal packet, and transmits it to the telephone number server 909-5 (step Q14x), the telephone number server 909-5 obtains the telephone number “TN3”, the external IP address “EB1”, the internal IP address “IB2”, and the terminal authentication information “PID3” from the received internal packet. It is stored in the storage format (step Q15x), and the acquired telephone number “TN3” is notified to the upper telephone number server 995 together with the identification code of the telephone number server 909-5 (step Q16x).

  The telephone number server 995 stores the telephone number “TN3” and terminal authentication information “PID3” held in step Q7 (FIG. 195) of telephone number registration, and the telephone number “TN3” and terminal authentication information “obtained in step Q16x”. A check is made to see if PID3 ″ matches, and it is determined whether the terminal authentication result is pass or fail. In the case of failure, the upper telephone number server 995 notifies the telephone number server 909-5 that the terminal authentication has failed (step Q17x), and the telephone number server 909-5 was held in step Q15x. The telephone number “TN3” and the terminal authentication information “PID3” are discarded (step Q18x), and the subsequent processing is interrupted.

When the terminal authentication result is acceptable, the upper telephone number server 995 notifies the telephone number server 908-5 of the location change request to the terminal 905-6x and the IP address “IP909-5” of the telephone number server 909-5. (Step Q19x), the telephone number server 908-5 forms an IP packet having the destination IP address “IP909-5” with all the information related to the mobile telephone 905-6 held in Step Q15 (FIG. 195). And transmit to the telephone number server 909-5 (step Q20x). The telephone number server 908-5 discards the transmitted information. The telephone number server 909-5 can hold information regarding the mobile telephone 905-6 acquired in the procedures of both step Q20x and step Q15x. However, the position of the mobile phone is 905-6x. The telephone number server 909-5 reports the terminal authentication result to the mobile telephone 905-6x via the proxy mobile telephone server 909-6, the network node device 909-1, and the radio base station 902-4 (steps Q22x to Q22x). Q25x).
<< Variations managed by a higher-level telephone number server >>
The upper telephone number server 995 manages related information such as the telephone number and IP address of the mobile telephone, and the telephone number servers 906-5 to 909-5 are intended only for fixed telephones, and the telephone number servers 906-5 to 909- A method in which 5 is not involved in the registration procedure and location change procedure of the mobile telephone will be described.

  FIG. 199 shows another implementation method of the mobile telephone registration procedure. The difference from FIG. 195 is that the processing of the telephone number servers 908-5 and 909-5 shown in FIG. 195 is transferred to the upper telephone number server 995. The procedure is as follows. Accordingly, FIG. 199 does not include telephone number servers 908-5 and 909-5. First, steps U1 to U4 in which steps Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 in FIG. 195 are replaced with steps U1, U2, U3, and U4 in FIG. 199 are performed, and then directly from the telephone management server 909-4. The telephone number server 995 is notified (step U5), and the telephone number server 995 holds the related information (step U7). Further, Steps U10 to U13 in which Steps Q10, Q11, Q12, and Q13 in FIG. 195 are replaced with Steps U10, U11, U12, and U13 in FIG. 199 are performed, and then directly from the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 The telephone number server 995 (step U14), the telephone number server 995 performs a terminal authentication procedure and the like (step U15), and notifies the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 of the processing result (step U20). Next, Steps U23 to U25 in which Steps Q23, Q24, and Q25 in FIG. 195 are replaced with Steps U23, U24, and U25 in FIG. 199 are performed.

FIG. 200 shows another implementation method of the registration procedure of the mobile telephone. The difference from FIG. 198 is that the telephone number servers 908-5 and 909-5 shown in FIG. The procedure is shifted to 995. First, steps Q10x, Q11x, Q12x, and Q13x in FIG. 198 are replaced with steps U10x, U11x, U12x, and U13x in FIG. 200, and then the higher-level telephone is directly connected from the proxy mobile phone server 909-6. The number server 995 is notified (step U14x), the proxy mobile phone server 909-6 holds the relevant information (step U21x), and the processing result is notified to the proxy mobile phone server 909-6 (step U22x). Next, the procedure in which steps Q23x, Q24x, and Q25x in FIG. 198 are replaced with steps U23x, U24x, and U25x in FIG. 198 is performed. In the communication case 2, the proxy mobile phone server 908-6 can be replaced with the proxy phone server 908-2 so that the proxy phone server 908-2 includes the function of the proxy mobile phone server 908-6. At this time, the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 can be omitted.
<< Communication Case 3: Communication between Mobile Phone and Fixed Phone >>
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining telephone communication from the mobile telephone 905-6 to the fixed telephone 905-4. The telephone number of the telephone 905-6 is “TN3” and the telephone number of the telephone 905-4 is “TN2”. . In this communication case 3, the calling side mobile telephone 905-6 side, that is, the calling side UNI interface (communication procedure between the radio base station 902-3 and the telephone management server 908-4) is shown in FIG. This is consistent with the calling-side UNI interface (communication procedure between the radio base station 902-3 and the telephone management server 908-4) described with reference to FIG. Further, in this case, the incoming side fixed telephone 905-4 side, that is, the incoming side UNI interface (communication procedure between the telephone management server 909-4 and the media router 903-4) uses FIG. This corresponds to the UNI interface (communication procedure between the telephone management server 909-4 and the media router 903-4) on the called side described above. Of course, the communication procedure (NNI interface) between the telephone management server 908-4 and the telephone management server 909-4 is unified within the IP network 900.
<< Connection Phase >>
When the telephone set 905-6 sends a call connection request, a radio channel connection request signal is transmitted to the radio base station 902-3 (step B01), and the radio base station 902-3 returns a call connection request acceptance (step B02). . Next, a call setup request is sent from the telephone set 905-6 to the radio base station 902-3 (step B03). When the radio base station sends a call setup request, the call setup request is sent to the network node device 908-1, The data is transmitted to the telephone management server 908-4 via the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6 (steps B04 to B06). The telephone management server 908-4 asks the telephone number server 908-5 and obtains an answer (steps B07 and B08).

Next, the telephone management server 908-4 sends a call setting acceptance and authentication request, and passes through the proxy mobile telephone server 908-6, the network node device 908-1, and the radio base station 902-3. Then, the telephone set 905-6 is notified (steps B09 to B12). The telephone set 905-6 transmits an authentication reply indicating the terminal validity in the opposite direction to that described above (steps B13 to B16). The telephone management server 908-4 sends out an IP packet including pass / fail of terminal authentication in the reverse direction (steps B17 to B20). Next, the telephone management server 908-4 forms an IAM packet for making a call setting request, and transmits it to the telephone management server 909-4 (step A21). The NNI interface is unified within the IP network 900, the calling-side UNI is the same as the calling-side UNI in the communication case 2, and the called-side UNI is the same as the called-side UNI in the communication case 1. It is. Therefore, hereinafter, it can be explained that telephone communication from the fixed telephone 905-1 to the mobile telephone 905-8 becomes possible by executing the communication procedure shown in FIG.
<< Communication Case 4: Communication between Fixed Phone and Mobile Phone >>
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining telephone communication from the fixed telephone 905-1 to the mobile telephone 905-8. The telephone number of the telephone 905-1 is “TN1”, and the telephone number of the telephone 905-8 is “TN4”. . In this communication case 4, the calling side fixed telephone 905-1 side, that is, the calling side UNI interface (communication procedure between the media router 903-1 and the telephone management server 906-4) uses FIG. This corresponds to the UNI interface (communication procedure between the media router 903-1 and the telephone management server 906-4) described above. In this case, the incoming side mobile telephone 905-8 side, that is, the incoming side UNI interface (communication procedure between the telephone management server 909-4 and the radio base station 902-4) is shown in FIG. This corresponds to the called-side UNI interface (communication procedure between the telephone management server 909-4 and the radio base station 902-4) described with reference to FIG. The communication procedure (NNI interface) between the telephone management server 906-4 and the telephone management server 909-4 is unified within the IP network 900.

Thus, when a call connection request is transmitted from the telephone set 905-6 (step A01), the media router 903-1 returns a call connection request acceptance (step A02), and the media router 903-1 is returned. Transmits a call setting request (step A04), and the call setting request reaches the telephone management server 906-4 (steps A04 to A06). The telephone management server 906-4 asks the telephone number server 906-8 and obtains an answer (steps A07 and A08). Next, the telephone management server 906-4 transmits an IP packet (IAM packet) for making a call setting request to the telephone management server 909-4 (step A21), and the content of the IAM packet is the proxy mobile telephone server. The call notification is reached to the telephone set 905-8 via the node 909-6, the network node device 909-1, and the radio base station 902-4 (steps B21 to B25). The NNI is unified within the IP network 900, the calling-side UNI is the same as the calling-side UNI in the communication case 1, and the called-side UNI is the same as the called-side UNI in the communication case 2. Therefore, it can be explained that telephone communication from the fixed telephone 905-1 to the mobile telephone 905-8 is possible by executing the communication procedure shown in FIG.
<< Variations in communication cases 1 to 4 >>
Each media router or radio base station manages the UNI format of the media router or radio base station, and can also notify the telephone management server. For example, in telephone communication from the fixed telephone 905-1 of the communication case 1 to the fixed telephone 905-4, the media router 903-1 stores the UNI format of the media router 903-1 in the IP packet 920 (FIG. 94), and the telephone. The management server 906-4 is notified (steps A04 to A06). In telephone communication from the mobile telephone 905-6 to the mobile telephone 905-8 in the communication case 2 (FIG. 127), the wireless base station 902-3 converts the UNI format of the wireless base station 902-3 into an IP packet 920B (FIG. 129). Store and notify the telephone management server 908-4 (steps B04 to B06). Similarly, the radio base station 902-4 stores the UNI format of the radio base station 902-4 in an IP packet and sends it to the network node device 909-1 (step B27b or B31). The telephone number server may be grouped into a telephone number server for fixed telephone communication and a telephone number server for mobile telephone communication, and communication between the telephone number servers may be limited to each group.
<< Wireless base station >>
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the media router or the fixed telephone holds an IP address, or that the radio base station or the mobile telephone holds an IP address. In FIG. 168, 950-1 is an IP communication network, 950-2 is a network node device, 951-1 is a radio base station, 951-2 is an IP communication line interface unit, 951-3 is a radio interface unit, 952-1 is Analog mobile telephones, 952-2 are digital mobile telephones, 952-3 and 953-4 are IP mobile telephones, and 953-1 to 953-4 are wireless communication paths.

  An IP packet including a telephone line connection control message and digital voice is transmitted / received to / from an IP communication line 950-3 between the radio base station 951-1 and the network node apparatus 950-2. The IP communication line interface unit 951-2 holds a plurality of IP addresses, and manages IP addresses and port numbers using a channel-IP address correspondence table 959 (FIG. 169). Control signals or voice signals 958-1 (FIG. 170) sent from the analog mobile telephone 952-1 are a voice transmission / reception unit 954-1, a wireless transmission / reception unit 955-1, a wireless communication path 953-1, and a wireless transmission / reception unit 956-1. Then, the control signal or voice signal is restored by reaching the wireless interface unit 951-3, and the control signal or voice signal is digitized by reaching the IP communication line interface unit 951-2, and becomes the payload of the IP packet 957-1. Can be placed. An example using the IP address “EA1” and the UDP port number 5002 is shown in the first row “..., EA1,5002, CN9531, MID-1000” in the wireless communication path-IP address correspondence table 959. The wireless communication path 953-1 indicated by the channel ID “CN9531” is shown, and the management ID “MID-1000” is used for management of charging for IP address usage. The case of the digital mobile telephone 952-2 is the same as that of the analog mobile telephone 952-1. An example using the IP address “EA1” and the UDP port number 5004 is the second line of the wireless communication path-IP address correspondence table 959. "..., EA1,5004, ...".

In the case where the digital mobile telephone 952-3 does not hold an IP address, the digital mobile telephone 952-3 instructs the IP communication line interface unit 951-2 to use the IP address “EA3” and the port number “5012”. IP packet 958-3 to be received is received (FIG. 171). Next, an IP packet 957-3 (same as 958-4) in which a control signal or a voice signal is digitally transmitted is transmitted, and the IP communication line interface unit 951-2 transmits the IP packet 956-4 to the IP line 950-3. To do. Next, in the case where the digital mobile telephone 952-4 holds the IP address “EA4”, the digital mobile telephone 952-4 transmits an IP packet 958-5 that digitally represents a control signal or a voice signal, and performs IP communication. The line interface unit 951-2 transmits an IP packet 957-4 (same as 958-5) to the IP line 950-3. The IP communication line interface unit 951-2 indicates that the IP address “EA3” and the port number “5012” have been lent to the IP mobile telephone 952-3, in the record “. , EA3, 5012,. It is important to grasp from the record “... EA4.
<< Root phone number server >>
Another implementation method for acquiring a related IP address from a telephone number, which is applied when the IP network 900 (FIG. 92) is enlarged, will be described with reference to FIG.

  900-10 to 900-12 are IP networks, 900-13 to 900-17 are termination gateways, 900-18 to 900-21 are relay gateways, 900-23 to 900-27 are media routers, 900-30 to 900- 32 is a radio base station, 900-33 to 900-35 are mobile telephones, 900-37 to 900-41 are fixed telephones, 995-1 to 995-3 are upper-level telephone number servers, and 995-4 is a root telephone number server. It is. The relay gateways are connected by an IP communication line. The IP networks 900-10 to 900-12 are individually managed by, for example, a communication carrier.

  The termination gateways 900-13 to 900-17 each include an individual telephone number server, similar to the termination gateway 901-1 (FIG. 92). The relay gateways 900-18 to 900-21 are disclosed as relay gateways that connect IP networks by IP communication lines in the prior application (FIG. 288, etc.). Similarly to the case where the upper telephone number server 995 (FIG. 92) performs processing for acquiring the relevant IP address from the telephone number in the IP network 900, the upper telephone number servers 995-1 to 995-3. (FIG. 201) performs processing related to IP addresses and related information related to telephone numbers in the IP networks 900-10 to 900-13, respectively. The upper telephone number servers 995-1 to 995-3 can send and receive IP packets including information on telephone numbers and IP addresses to / from the root telephone number server 995-4 (steps 995-10 to 995 in FIGS. 202 and 203). -12). Further, after the upper telephone number servers 995-1 and 995-3 obtain the IP address of the other server by inquiring of the root telephone number server 995-4, information on the telephone number and the IP address using the acquired IP address. Can be transmitted and received (step 995-13). An IP packet transferred between the IP networks 900-10 to 900-12 passes through the relay gateways 900-18 to 900-21.

  The telephone number server in the terminating gateway 900-13 obtains the IP address and related information from the telephone number “TN900-35” of the mobile telephone 900-35, so that the telephone number “TN900- 35 ", the upper telephone number server 995-1 presents the telephone number" TN900-35 "to the root telephone number server 995-4, and the root telephone number server 995-4 becomes the upper telephone number server 995-3. Presents the telephone number "TN900-35". Then, the upper telephone number server 995-3 returns the IP address and related information related to the telephone number “TN900-35”, and the IP packet including the IP address and related information related to the returned telephone number “TN900-35” is It flows in the reverse direction to the above, and is delivered to the telephone number server inside the terminating gateway 900-13 as the inquiry source via the route telephone number server 995-4 and the upper telephone number server 995-1. A technique known as a domain name server can be adopted as an inquiry procedure between a plurality of telephone number servers for obtaining an associated IP address from the telephone number “TN900-35”.

In addition, the telephone number server inside the terminating gateway 900-13 may query the telephone number “TN900-40” of the fixed telephone 900-40 from the higher telephone number server 995-1 to obtain the IP address and related information. It is possible to carry out in the same manner as the series of procedures. In summary, in the case where a plurality of IP networks are connected, the telephone number server in the IP network 1 is the upper telephone number server 1, the root telephone number server in the IP network 1, and the upper telephone number in the IP network 2. Via the server 2, an IP address and related information related to the telephone number “TEL2” managed by the higher-level telephone number server 2 can be inquired and acquired.
<< Variation that calls a higher-level telephone number server >>
In the procedure of telephone communication from the fixed telephone 905-1 to the fixed telephone 905-4 shown in FIG. 93, the procedure (steps A07, A08) related to the telephone management server 906-4 and the telephone number server 906-5 is replaced with It is possible to change to another procedure for calling the telephone number server 995, which will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 204, the steps of the telephone communication procedure excluding steps A07x, A07y, A08x, A08y are all the same as the steps shown in FIG. 93, and different steps A07x, A07y, A08x, A08y will be described.

  In step A07 of FIG. 204 (same as step A07 of FIG. 93), the telephone number server 906-5 receives an IP packet including a question regarding the destination telephone number “TN2” and the transmission source telephone number “TN1”. The telephone number server 906-5 holds address-related information (various addresses and UNI type) relating to the telephone number “TN1”, but does not have address information relating to the telephone number “TN2”. The number server 906-5 sends information about the telephone number “TN2” to the higher-level telephone number server 995 to inquire (Step A07x). The higher-level telephone number server 995 sends the telephone number “TN2” to the telephone number server 909-5 holding the address-related information regarding the telephone number “TN2” to inquire about the address-related information (Step A07y). ), The telephone number server 909-5 replies with the address related information regarding the telephone number "TN2". That is, the address “EA2” of the media router and the internal IP address “IA2” at the end of the communication line, the external IP address “EA82” and the internal IP address “IA82” of the proxy telephone server, and the IP of the telephone management server An address “IA92” and the media router UNI type are returned. The address-related information that has been replied passes through the higher-order telephone number server 995 (step A08x) and further passes through the telephone number server 906-5 (step A08y) to reach the telephone management server 906-4. (Step A08). Note that the telephone number server 906-5 can reply directly to the telephone number server 906-5 without going through the upper telephone number server 995. A series of steps A07x, A07y, A08x, A08y can be performed by a recursive call function of a known domain name server.

Further, in the procedure of telephone communication from the mobile telephone 905-6 to the mobile telephone 905-8 shown in FIG. 127, a procedure for calling the upper telephone number server 995 is possible, which will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 205, the steps of the telephone communication procedure excluding steps B07x, B07y, B08x, and B08y are all the same as the steps shown in FIG. 127, and different steps B07x, B07y, B08x, and B08y will be described. When the telephone management server 908-4 receives an IP packet including a question regarding the destination telephone number “TN4” and the transmission source telephone number “TN3” (step B06), the telephone management server 908-4 sends the telephone number “TN4” to the higher-level telephone number server 995. The telephone number server 995 inquires about the address information related to the telephone number “TN4” to the telephone number server 909-5 (step B07y). The telephone number server 909-5 replies to the telephone management server 908-4 via the upper telephone number server 995 (step B08x) with an answer including the address related information for the question (step B08y).
<< Communication Case 5: Communication between Multimedia Terminals Based on Common Line Signal System >>
FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining communication between multimedia terminals based on telephone call connection control. Communication in the communication case 1 (FIG. 93) includes a fixed telephone 905-1, a media router 903-1, a network node device 906-1, a proxy telephone server 906-2, a telephone management server 906-4, and a telephone management server 909-4. In contrast, the communication shown in FIG. 173 is a fixed telephone, whereas the proxy telephone server 909-2, the network node device 909-1, the media router 903-4, and the fixed telephone 905-4 perform communication control. In this communication, the multimedia terminal 905-10 is used instead of 905-1, and the multimedia terminal 905-16 is used instead of the fixed telephone 905-4. The multimedia terminals 905-10 and 905-16 include, for example, a terminal device having a function of transmitting and receiving voice and still images, a desktop data processing device (such as a personal computer), a telephone, a portable data processing device (PDA), voice and It is a terminal device, a telephone set, a portable telephone set, a TV transmitter / receiver having a function of transmitting / receiving still images or moving images, or various data, or a terminal device in which the functions of the devices and devices are integrated.

  Steps A01 to A60 for inter-terminal communication connection shown in FIG. 93 correspond to steps J01 to J60 for inter-terminal communication connection shown in FIG. 173, respectively, and steps A70 to A80-1 are shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to the steps J70 to J80-1 for the terminal-to-terminal communication connection, and the terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method between the terminal 905-1 and the terminal 905-4 is the terminal 905- 10 and the terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method between the terminals 905-16.

  J68 (FIG. 173) indicates the range of the inter-terminal media communication, J69-1 indicates the inter-terminal high-level communication start procedure, J69-2 indicates the inter-terminal media communication, and J69-3 indicates the inter-terminal high-level communication end procedure. J69-1 and J69-3 belong to the inter-terminal high-level communication control layer, and J69-2 belongs to the inter-terminal media communication layer.

  Furthermore, with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, a method in which the terminals 905-10 and 905-16 communicate with each other using a telephone number will be described. FIG. 174 is a simplified diagram of FIG. 92 for explaining the communication between the terminals 905-10 and 905-16. The servers in the termination control units 914-1 (FIG. 92) and 914-4 are shown in FIG. The description is omitted, and therefore some procedures in the termination control unit 914-1 are omitted. FIG. 175 simplifies FIG. 173.

  The terminal 905-10 sends a call connection request (step J01), the media router 903-1 returns a call connection request acceptance (step J02), and the media router 903-1 then sends the terminal 905 serving as the transmission source. A call setting request including the telephone number “TN5” of 10 and the telephone number “TN6” of the destination terminal 905-16 is transmitted to the termination control unit 914-1 in the termination gateway 901-1 (step J04). The termination control unit 914-1 forms an initial address message (IAM packet) including the telephone numbers “TN5” and “TN6” and sends it to the IP network 900 (step J21). The IAM packet is transmitted to the control communication line 912. -1 (FIG. 92) to the termination control unit 914-4. The termination control unit 914-4 notifies the terminal 905-16 of the call arrival notification obtained by receiving the IAM packet via the media router 903-4 (step J24). The media router 903-4 returns (step J31), and then the termination control unit 914-4 forms an address completion message (ACM packet) informing the possibility of reception of the call setup request based on the IAM packet, and terminates the control unit. It returns to 914-1 (step J34), and the ACM packet reaches the termination control unit 914-1 via the control communication line 912-1. Furthermore, information indicating the possibility of reception in the ACM packet can be transmitted to the media router 903-1 (step J37, option).

  When the terminal 905-16 notifies the media router 903-4 that the telephone is being called (step J40), the media router 903-4 notifies the termination control unit 914-4 that the telephone is being called (step J41). When the termination control unit 914-4 receives a telephone call, it forms a call message “CPG” and sends it (step J44). The call message “CPG” is transferred within the IP network 900, and the termination control unit 914-1 To reach. The termination control unit 914-1 notifies the terminal 905-10 of the telephone call via the media router 903-1 (steps J47 and J48).

  When the terminal 905-16 responds, the response reaches the termination control unit 914-4 via the media router 903-4 (step J50) (step J51). The termination control unit 914-4 forms and sends a response message (ACM packet) (step J54). The ACM packet is transferred through the IP network 900 and reaches the termination control unit 914-1. The termination control unit 914-1 notifies the terminal 905-10 of the response via the media router 903-1, and communication between the terminals becomes possible (steps J57 and J58). The terminal 905-10 can send a response confirmation to the media router 903-1 following step J58 (step J59, option). Also, the media router 903-4 can send a response confirmation to the terminal following step J50 (step J60, option).

  Through the above procedure, the communication path via the IP transfer network was established between the terminals 905-10 and 905-16 by the No. 7 common line signal system based procedure using the telephone number. Next, the terminals 905-10 and 905-16 execute an inter-terminal high-level communication start procedure (step J69-1). As the inter-terminal high-level communication start procedure, for example, establishment of a voice image communication logical channel, selection of a communication mode, designation of flow control, exchange of terminal capability information, and the like can be performed. Next, a plurality of IP packets storing voice, images, text data, etc. are transmitted and received between the terminal 905-10 and the terminal 905-16, and inter-terminal media communication is performed (step J69-2). The IP packet storing voice, image, text data, etc. is transferred via the network node device 906-1 and the communication line 913-3 for media transfer. When the inter-terminal media communication ends, the terminals 905-10 and 905-16 execute the established inter-terminal high-level communication termination procedure (step J69-3).

  Next, when the terminal 905-10 issues a release request (steps J70 and J71), the termination control unit 914-1 sends a REL packet informing the release (step J74), and the termination control unit 914-4 completes the release. An RLC packet to inform is returned (step J84). The termination control unit 914-4 notifies the terminal 906-16 of a release notification (Steps J78, J79) and receives a release confirmation (Steps J80, J81). The media router 903-4 can also send a release report confirmation (step J80-1, option). Also, the termination control unit 914-1 notifies the release notification to the media router 903-1 (step J87). The media router 903-1 can also send a release confirmation (step J70-1, option). Through the above procedure, the communication path set for the inter-terminal communication is released.

  In FIG. 176, there is a UDP layer above the IP communication layer, a line connection control (call connection control) layer based on the No. 7 common line signaling system above the UDP layer, and above the line connection control layer. It shows that there is an inter-terminal high-level communication control layer, and there is a communication media layer above the inter-terminal high-level communication control layer.

It can be implemented by placing a line connection control layer based on the No. 7 common line signaling system above the IP layer and omitting the UDP layer. A technique for placing a line connection control layer above the IP layer is disclosed in a prior application patent (FIG. 206 in Example 13). A line connection control layer placed above the IP layer is defined as a new protocol, and a port field (in the header field of the UDP segment or TCP segment) in the same format as the header field of the header of the new protocol segment of the line connection control layer. 16 bits × 2, IPv4). In this way, the disadvantage that the port number cannot be used without the UDP layer can be overcome. The new protocol segment in the line connection control layer has a format similar to the UDP segment and the TCP segment, and it can be expected that the IP communication apparatus is simplified. The technique of placing the line connection control layer based on the common line signal system on the upper layer of the IP layer can be applied to all of the communication cases 1 to 5.
<< Communication case 6: Communication between multimedia terminals for setting a communication record >>
FIG. 177 shows a communication method between multimedia terminals (dynamic setting method of communication record) which is not based on the No. 7 common line signal system. A communication method in which the IP terminal 905-11 and the IP terminal 905-14 respectively communicate via the telephone management servers 906-4 and 907-4 will be described.

The identification name of the terminal 905-11 is “TN7”, and the IP address is “EA7”. The identification name of the terminal 905-14 is “TN8”, and the IP address is “EA8”. The terminal 905-11 transmits using the port number “7070”, and the terminal 905-14 transmits using the port number “7080”. The IP terminals 905-11 and 905-14 are also multimedia terminals that store text data, digitized voice, still images, moving images, and the like in IP packets for transmission / reception. For example, the identification names “TN7” and “TN8” can be an e-mail address or a homepage identification symbol (URL) provided by a WWW server.
<< Connection Phase >>
An IP packet 971 (FIG. 179) is transmitted from the IP terminal 905-11 (step K01 in FIG. 177). The IP packet 971 passes through the media router 903-1 (step K04) and passes through the network node device 906-1. Are encapsulated to become an internal IP packet 972 (FIG. 180), reach the proxy telephone server 906-2 (step K05), become an IP packet 973 (FIG. 181), and reach the telephone management server 906-4 (step K06). ). The IP packet 971 includes at least “TN7”, “TN8”, and “7070”. Note that the technique in which the IP packet transmitted from the IP terminal 905-11 reaches the network node device through the media router without changing the IP address is the prior patent (FIG. 114 of Japanese Patent Application No. 2001-078270). The well-known technique described in the above is applied.
<< CIC management table creation >>
The telephone management server 906-4 applies a rule determined in advance in the IP network 900 from the transmission source identification name “TN7” and the destination identification name “TN8” obtained by reading the IP packet 973. The CIC number “CIC-8” is determined, and the telephone management server 906-4 further sends various IP addresses and destination IP terminals 905 related to the destination identification names “TN7” and “TN8” to the telephone number server 906-5. -14 sends an IP packet 974 (FIG. 182) for asking about the UNI type of the media router 903-3 connected to the media router 903-3 and the port number used by the destination IP terminal 905-14 (step K07). A packet 975 (FIG. 183) is obtained (step K08).

The telephone management server 906-4 further creates a CIC management table 976-1 (FIG. 184), the CIC number “CIC-8”, the UNI type “UNI1” of the media router 903-1, and the media router 903-3. UNI type “UNI2”, source identification name “TN7”, destination identification name “TN8”, external IP address “EA7” and internal IP address “IA8”, procedure classification “IAM”, and write time “St-7” "And the elapsed time until completion (timer value)" Time7 "are written. The type of information content written in the CIC management table 976-1 (FIG. 184) is determined depending on the UNI type “UNI1” of the media router 903-1.
<< Regulation of number of IP packet transmissions per line >>
The telephone management server 906-4 extracts the source IP address “EA7” from the CIC management table 976-1 and writes it in the transmission number management table under the management of the telephone management server 906-4. The number of lines in use is increased by “1” and compared with the upper limit number of lines. If the number of lines in use exceeds the upper limit number of lines, the process is interrupted without proceeding to the subsequent connection phase. The transmission number management table has the same format as the call management table 918-1 (FIG. 124).
<< Communication permission notice >>
Next, the telephone management server 906-4 forms and sends an internal IP packet 978 (FIG. 185) notifying that communication between the IP terminal 905-11 and the IP terminal 905-14 is possible (step K55). The proxy telephone server 906-2 converts the IP packet 978 into an IP packet 979 (FIG. 186) and sends it to the network node device 906-1 (step K56), and the IP packet 980 obtained by decapsulation ( FIG. 187) passes the media router 903-1 (step K57) and reaches the IP terminal 905-11 (step K58). The contents of the IP packet 980 include the IP address “EA8” and the port number “7080” of the destination IP terminal 905-14. When the IP packet 978 is formed, the telephone management server 906-4 reads the IP address “EA8” and the port number “7080” from the IP packet 975 (FIG. 183) and writes them in the IP packet 978.

Next, the telephone management server 906-4 refers to the IP address information in the CIC management table 976-1, and generates an IP packet 977 (FIG. 188) (IAM packet) for notification of communication record creation required for communication between terminals. ) And the IP packet 977 is transmitted to the telephone management server 907-4 (step K21). The telephone management server 907-4 receives the IP packet 977 and forms the CIC management table 976-2 (FIG. 189) on the receiving side by the same method as described in other communication cases.
<< Regulation of number of incoming IP packets per line >>
The telephone management server 907-4 extracts the destination IP address “EA8” from the received IP packet 977 (FIG. 188) and writes it in the incoming call count management table. The number of incoming IP packets per line is regulated such as increasing the number of lines in use by “1”.
<< Communication Record Settings >>
Subsequent to step K21, the telephone management server 906-4 takes out the IP address “EA7, IA7, EA8, IA8” of the record in the first row of the CIC management table 976-1 (FIG. 184), and the table management server. 906-3 is requested (step K66), and the table management server 906-3 receives the communication record “IA7 in the fifth row of the device control table 910-1 (FIG. 120) in the network node device 906-1. , IA8, EA7, EA8, MK25, MK26,... ”(Step K67). Further, the telephone management server 906-4 sets a time lapse interrupt timer corresponding to the CIC number “CIC-8” according to the elapsed time (timer value) “Time7” included in the CIC management table 976-1. Set.

Similarly, the telephone management server 907-4 takes out the IP address “EA8, IA7, EA8, IA7” of the record in the first row of the CIC management table 976-2, and requests the table management server 907-3 ( In step K64), the table management server 907-3 records "IA8, IA7, EA8, EA7, MK26" in the third row of the device control table 910-2 (FIG. 121) in the network node device 907-1. , MK25,... "(Step K65). Further, the telephone management server 907-4 sets a time elapsed interrupt timer corresponding to the CIC number “CIC-8” according to the elapsed time “Time7” included in the CIC management table 976-2.
<< Inter-terminal communication >>
When receiving the IP packet 980 (FIG. 187) (step K58), the IP terminal 905-11 receives the IP address “EA8” and the port number “7080” corresponding to the identification name “TN8” of the IP terminal 905-14 as the communication partner. To get. The IP terminal 905-11 forms an IP packet 981 (FIG. 190) to be transmitted to the IP terminal 905-14. The IP packet 981 sent from the IP terminal 905-11 passes through the media router 903-1 (step K68-1) and reaches the network node device 906-1 (step K68-2). Then, the communication record in the fifth line of the set device control table 910-1 (FIG. 120) is applied to become an internal packet 982 (FIG. 191), and the internal packet 982 is transferred inside the IP network 900 (step K68). -3) reaches the network node device 907-1, is decapsulated here, and the IP packet 981 is restored and transmitted, passes through the media router (step K68-4), and reaches the terminal 905-14 (Step K68-5). The IP packet transmitted from the IP terminal 905-14 is transferred in the reverse direction on the communication path and reaches the IP terminal 905-11 (steps K69-1 to K69-5). The IP terminals 905-11 and 905-14 exchange data by appropriately sending and receiving IP packets.
<< Deletion of communication record >>
When the time lapse interrupt timer corresponding to the set CIC number “CIC-8” starts after the predetermined time “Time7” has elapsed, the telephone management server 906-4 sends the CIC number to the table management server 906-3. An instruction is given to delete the corresponding communication record in the device control table 910-1 corresponding to “CIC-8” (step K96 in FIG. 177), and the table management server 906-3 deletes the communication record (step K97). Similarly, when the time lapse interrupt timer corresponding to the CIC number “CIC-8” is activated after the predetermined time “Time7” has elapsed, the telephone management server 907-4 notifies the table management server 907-3 of the device control table. An instruction is given to delete the corresponding communication record in 910-2 (step K98), and the table management server 907-3 deletes the communication record (step K99).
<< Other methods for deleting communication records >>
Referring to FIG. 178, steps K01 to K69-5, that is, a communication request is sent from the terminal 905-11, and communication is performed in which IP packets are transmitted and received between the terminal 905-11 and the terminal 905-14. The steps from middle to completion are almost the same, and the difference is that both the telephone management servers 906-4 and 907-4 do not set the time lapse interrupt timer. When the terminal 905-11 forms and sends an IP packet notifying that the communication is to be terminated (step K70), the IP packet is sent via the media router 903-1, the network node device 906-1, and the proxy telephone server 906-2. The management server 906-4 is reached (steps K71 to K73). The format of the IP packet transmitted from the terminal 905-11 is the same format as that of the IP packet transmitted in step K01, and the difference further includes a communication end notification “END”. The format of the IP packet sent in step K72 is the same format as the IP packet 972 (FIG. 180) sent in step K05. Similarly, the format of the IP packet sent in step K73 is sent in step K06. The IP packet 973 (FIG. 181) has the same format as that of FIG.

Upon receiving the communication end notification at step K73, the telephone management server 906-4 first calculates the CIC number “CIC-8” using the identification names “TN7” and “TN8”, and sends the communication communication end notification to the telephone management server. The communication end of “CIC-8” is notified to 907-4 (step K74). Next, the table management server 906-3 is instructed to delete the corresponding communication record in the device control table 910-1 (step K96x), and the table management server 906-3 receives the communication record (line 5). (Eye record) is deleted (step K97x). When the telephone management server 907-4 receives the communication end notification of “CIC-8” in step K74, the telephone management server 907-4 deletes the corresponding communication record in the device control table 910-2 with respect to the table management server 906-3. The table management server 906-3 deletes the communication record (record on the third line) (step K99x).
<< Summary of Communication Case 6 >>
The IP network includes a network node device 1 and a network node device 2, and the terminal 1 transmits an IP packet requesting communication including the identification name 1 of the terminal 1 and the identification name 2 of the terminal 2 to the network node device 1, and the identification name The internal packet including 1 and the identification name 2 reaches the telephone management server 1, and the telephone management server 1 acquires and returns an IP address and a port number corresponding to the identification name 2 via the telephone number server. The telephone management server 1 notifies the telephone management server 2 of a communication request from the terminal 1 to the terminal 2, and the telephone management server 1 requests the table management server 1 to connect the terminal 1 and the terminal 2 in the network node device 1. The telephone management server 2 requests the table management server 2 to send and receive data between the terminal 1 and the terminal 2 in the network node device 2. Set another communication record for encapsulation of the IP packet. The terminal 1 receives an IP packet including an IP address and a port number via the network node device 1, and the terminal 1 sends out an IP packet whose destination is the IP address and port number corresponding to the acquired identification name 2. The IP packet is encapsulated by using the communication record set in the network node device 1 and becomes an internal packet. The internal packet is transferred through the communication network and reaches the network node device 2. The network node device 2 uses the set communication record to be decapsulated and arrives at the terminal 2, and the telephone management server 1 and the telephone management server 2 communicate with each other after a certain time has passed. The record is to be deleted.

The identification name 2 corresponds only to the IP address and does not correspond to the port number, and the telephone management server can also prevent the port number from being returned. As a variation, when the terminal 1 or the terminal 2 sends an IP packet indicating the end of communication, the telephone management server requests the table management server, and the communication record used for the terminal 1 and the terminal 2 can be deleted.
<< Other methods for specifying the port number of the destination terminal >>
As an example of the communication case 6, the terminal 905-14 uses the port number “7080”, and the telephone management server 906-5 stores the port number “7080” in the IP packet 975 and responds. As another implementation method, the telephone management server 906-5 does not answer the port number “7080”. In this case, the IP packet 978 to the IP packet 980 do not include the port number “7080”. In this case, the communication carrier managing the IP network 900 discloses the port number “7080” of the terminal 905-14. The terminal 905-11 uses the disclosed port number. The format of the CIC management table and the record with the line number “CIC-8” are common to the communication cases 1 to 5, and common rules in the IP network 900 such as operation management and billing can be applied. .

The terminal 905-14 as the destination terminal uses the record “IA8, IA7, EA8, EA7, MK26, MK25,...” In the third row of the device control table 910-2 (FIG. 121). A port control record (such as FIG. 53) referred to from the record is set in the port filter 1 (that is, a call source port number and a call destination port number are specified). Then, the terminal 905-14 receives only the IP packet having the destination port number “7080” or transmits only the IP packet having the source port number “7080”. As a result, in the communication between the two terminals, the terminal 905-14 does not receive an IP packet other than the destination port number “7080”, and the terminal 905-11 is other than the source port number “7080”. Is not received. In this way, secure communication is achieved.
<< Secure end-to-end socket communication using port filters >>
The terminal 2 can perform secure communication by receiving only the IP packet including the port number of the terminal 2 as the destination port number. However, the identification name and port number of the terminal 2 are disclosed. A plurality of port numbers of the terminal 2 can be specified. For example, the port number can be 25 (port number for electronic mail) and 80 (port number for WWW server). Then, the terminal 2 can safely perform e-mail communication and WWW server operation. The IP address of the terminal 2 is also a public value obtained from the public identification name of the terminal 2. By limiting the socket number of the terminal 905-14 in this way, secure socket communication (communication using an IP address and a port number) is achieved.

  Socket communication between the terminal 1 and the terminal 2 will be described. The terminal 1 presents the identification name of the terminal 2 to the telephone number server in the IP network, and acquires the IP address of the terminal 2. At this time, the telephone management server instructs the table management server to set the port filter 1 (the incoming call destination port number and the outgoing call source port number) in the communication record of the device control table in the network node device 2. Further, the port filter 2 (transmission permitted destination port number and incoming call permitted source port number) is set in the communication record of the device control table in the network node device 1. Next, the terminal 1 sends an external packet having the acquired IP address of the terminal 2 as a destination IP address, and the network node apparatus 1 converts the external IP packet into an internal packet. The internal packet is transmitted through the IP network. The internal packet is restored to the external IP packet in the network node device 2 and transferred to the terminal 2 with the port number of the terminal 2 included in the device control table in the network node device 2 being the destination port number. Other than the external IP packet included as is discarded. When the external packet is transferred in the reverse direction, the external packet is transmitted from the terminal 2, and the network node device 2 uses the port number of the terminal 2 included in the device control table in the network node device 2 as the source port number. Only the included external IP packet is converted into an internal packet, the internal packet is transferred through the IP network, and the network node apparatus 1 restores the external IP packet from the internal packet and delivers it to the terminal 1.

  Further, when added to the inter-terminal communication using the IP network, in the network node device 1, only the external IP packet including the port number of the terminal 2 recorded in the device control table in the network node device 1 as the destination port number is included. In the reverse communication, the received internal packet includes the port number of the terminal 2 recorded in the device control table in the network node device 1 as the source port number. Only the external IP packet may be restored.

In summary, the network node device performs encapsulation and decapsulation using the device control table, performs the communication function 1 and the communication function 2, and at least a packet filter function using the protocol type, packet priority control, A terminal-to-terminal socket communication service including one or more multicast functions can be implemented. Here, the communication function 1 of the network node device selects the external packet depending on the socket number in the input external packet to form an internal packet, and the communication function 2 of the network node device restores This function selects the external packet to be restored depending on the socket number in the external packet. As a variation, the network node device performs an address check using a device control table, performs the communication function 1 and the previous communication function 2, and at least a packet filter function using a protocol type, packet priority control, A terminal-to-terminal socket communication service including one or more multicast functions can be implemented.
<< Overall Description of Communication Case 1 to Communication Case 6 >>
<Upper protocol>
In communication case 1 to communication case 6, the protocol type item in the header of the IP packet transmitted / received to / from network node device 906-1, proxy telephone server 906-2, and telephone management server 906-4 is IP communication network 900. It can be used in a uniform manner inside, for example, as “UDP”. FIG. 176 shows the communication procedure described in communication case 1 to communication case 4 of the present embodiment as a protocol stack diagram. From the communication lower layer to the communication upper layer, the physical layer (one layer), the data link layer (2 layers), IP layer (3 layers), UDP layer (4 layers), there is a communication function layer that shows a line connection control procedure using a telephone number based on the common line signal system, and the application is defined at a higher level. There is a high-level communication procedure. For communication between servers in the IP communication network 900, a UDP segment is stored in an internal IP packet.

  The protocol type item in the header of the IP packet transmitted / received to / from the telephone management server 906-4 may be further used as “ICMP”, or a protocol type unique to the IP communication network 900 may be newly determined and used. it can. The same applies to the protocol type item in the header of the IP packet transmitted / received to / from network node device 909-1, proxy telephone server 909-2, and telephone management server 909-4.

  In this embodiment, the line connection control message (IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLC) is an embodiment in which a UDP segment is set in the payload of an IP packet (IPv4) defined in RFC791. A TCP segment can be used instead of the segment, which is described in another embodiment. It is also possible to implement by omitting the UDP layer by placing a line connection control layer based on the common line signal system above the IP layer.

The telephone number is a telephone number used for a fixed telephone or a mobile telephone, and the telephone number and additional information (IP address and others) of the telephone number are registered in the telephone number server via the user service server and the telephone management server. Yes. In addition, when a telephone number used in a mobile telephone is registered in the telephone number server, a terminal authentication procedure is performed to confirm the validity of the telephone number and the accompanying information of the telephone number. The telephone number server includes the external IP address of the media router to which the fixed telephone 1 having the telephone number “TN1” is connected, the internal IP address of the logical terminal at the end of the communication line to which the media router is connected, and the proxy It holds the external IP address and internal IP address of the telephone server, the internal IP address of the telephone management server, and the UNI of the media router. Further, the external IP address of the media router 1 is changed to the external IP address of the telephone 1, that is, the telephone number server has the external IP address of the telephone 1, the internal IP address of the logical terminal, and the proxy telephone. It is also possible to hold the IP address and UNI of the server and the telephone management server. That is, the various information attached to the telephone number is held. Further, the telephone number server can acquire the incidental information of the other telephone number “TN2” by making an inquiry to the other telephone number server.
<Integrated server installation>
In the implementation of the communication case 1 to the communication case 6, the proxy telephone server 906-2, the table management server 906-3, the telephone management server 906-4, and the telephone number server 906-5 in the termination gateway 914-1 are in one computer. It can be implemented by providing a plurality of servers as a plurality of application programs inside the computer and assigning individual port numbers. Similarly, a plurality of servers in the end gateways 914-2 to 914-4 can be implemented by assigning individual port numbers as a plurality of application programs in the computer, respectively.
Further, from the termination control unit 914-1, a media router 903-1 or the like is connected but no radio base station is implemented, and the proxy mobile phone server 906-6 can be omitted.
<Summary 1: Communication between fixed and mobile phones>
In the terminal-to-terminal communication connection control procedure via the terminal 1, the media router 1 or the radio base station 1, the telephone management server 1, the telephone management server 2, the media router 2 or the radio base station 2, and the terminal 2, the terminal and the media router or wireless The communication communication with the base station performs a communication procedure based on the individual interface of the terminal, and the communication procedure between the media router or the radio base station and the telephone management server is a UNI for the media router or the radio base station, The communication procedure between the management server 1 and the telephone management server 2 is NNI based on the common line signaling method, and the telephone management server includes at least a function of performing UNI for the radio base station. The UNI for the media router or the radio base station is acquired from the telephone management server 1 by inquiring to the telephone number server 2, and the telephone management server is used for managing the communication procedure. The acquired UNI can be recorded in the CIC management table managed by the telephone management server and used for managing the communication procedure. In addition, in the case where the telephone management server 1 and the telephone management server 2 match, a communication method between telephones is possible. In this case, an internal IP packet transmitted / received between the telephone management server 1 and the telephone management server 2 can be used. This is achieved by omitting sending and receiving. That is, the inter-terminal communication connection control procedure for connecting the terminal 1, the media router 1 or the radio base station 1, the telephone management server, the media router 2 or the radio base station 2, and the terminal 2 through the communication line can be performed. At this time, the NNI based on the No. 7 common line signal system between the telephone management server 1 and the telephone management server 2 is omitted.

  The IP network includes two or more network node devices, and external packets sent from the media router 1 or the radio base station 1 become internal packets based on the management of the device control table of the network node device on the transmission side. The packet is transferred inside the network, and the internal packet is restored to an external packet in the network node device on the called side and sent to the media router 2 or the radio base station 2. The terminal 1, the media router 1 or the radio base station 1, the telephone management server 1, the telephone management server 2, the media router 2 or the radio base station 2, and the communication between the terminal 2 and the terminal 2 are performed to communicate with the media router or the radio base station. The communication procedure with the telephone management server is UNI for the media router or radio base station, and the communication procedure between the telephone management server 1 and the telephone management server 2 is NNI based on the No. 7 common line signal system. A terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method is performed. The external packet is input from the logical terminal of the external communication line, and if three sets of the input logical terminal identification information of the input side, the source external IP address in the external packet, and the destination external IP address are determined, Based on the management of the device control table in the network node device, the internal call destination address of the internal packet is determined. An internal communication line through which internal packets are transferred between the originating and terminating network node devices based on the management of the device control table and the relay device control table in the originating and terminating network node devices. It can be paraphrased that is determined. The internal packet is transferred inside the communication network and restored to the external packet in the network node device on the receiving side. It is possible to use two sets of the input logical terminal identification information of the input side and the destination external IP address in the external packet, and not to use the source external IP address in the external packet.

  By specifying the communication record using the communication record ID in the device control table, it is possible to charge a telephone communication fee for a telephone in which at least one is a mobile telephone. In terminal-to-terminal communication, the number of calls can be regulated using a call management table. In addition, the number of incoming calls can be regulated using the incoming call management table. Further, in the inter-terminal communication, the operation server can inquire the telephone management server, acquire information in the CIC management table used for the inter-terminal communication, and charge the communication fee. The wireless base station includes an IP communication line interface unit, a wireless interface unit, and a wireless transmission / reception unit. The wireless transmission / reception unit includes a wireless communication path for analog mobile telephones, a wireless communication path for digital mobile telephones, and a wireless communication path for IP mobile telephones. The telephone communication with any one or more of these is possible. The IP communication line interface unit is a wireless base station that manages an IP address used by the mobile phone using a wireless communication path-IP address correspondence table. The technique described in another embodiment, in which the internal packet can be any of IPv4, IPv6, Ether frame, MPLS frame, and HDLC network, can be applied to this embodiment.

  The IP network is capable of both mobile phone communication between the mobile phone 1 and the mobile phone 2, and communication between the fixed phone between the fixed phone 1 and the fixed phone 2, and between the mobile phone and the fixed phone. It is also possible to perform telephone communication via the IP network. The user applies for registration of the mobile phone with at least the phone number and the address of the mobile phone, the acceptor notifies the user of the terminal authentication information and the address of the proxy mobile phone server, and the user receives the phone number and the address of the mobile phone. , Set the terminal authentication information and proxy mobile phone server address in the mobile phone, and the higher-order phone number server stores at least the phone number and the terminal authentication information inside the phone number server, thereby registering the phone number of the mobile phone Is supposed to do.

  The mobile phone transmits the location registration request information, and the external packet including the location registration request information is delivered as an internal packet to the upper telephone number server via the network node device, and the upper telephone number server receives the reception The mobile phone is authorized by using at least the phone number and terminal authentication information of the mobile phone included in the location registration request and the phone number and terminal authentication information held in the telephone number registration procedure of the information mobile phone. The initial location registration of the mobile phone is performed by performing an authentication procedure for checking whether the phone is a mobile phone.

  The mobile phone transmits location change request information, and an external packet including the location change request information is delivered as an internal packet to the upper telephone number server via the network node device, and the upper telephone number server receives the reception The mobile phone is authorized by using at least the phone number and terminal authentication information of the mobile phone included in the location change request and the phone number and terminal authentication information held in the telephone number registration procedure of the information mobile phone. Authenticate to check if it is a phone. Next, the mobile phone location change procedure is performed by transmitting information related to the mobile phone to a telephone number server that manages the location change destination of the mobile phone or a higher-order phone number server. As a variation, the higher-order telephone number server can manage related information such as the telephone number and IP address of the mobile telephone, and the telephone number server can also manage related information such as the telephone number and IP address of the fixed telephone.

In a network node apparatus that performs communication between mobile telephones and a network node apparatus that performs communication between mobile telephones, an internal packet is formed from an external IP packet by an encapsulation and decapsulation function of the network node apparatus, and an external packet is Both the restoration method and the method of selecting the external packet selected by the address check using the registration information in the network node device described in the other embodiments and making it an internal packet are possible. The network node device can also perform a packet filter function, a packet priority control, a multicast control, and a signature function using a protocol type and a port number. In the case where a plurality of IP networks are connected, the telephone number server connected to the IP network 1 is the upper telephone number server 1, the root telephone number server connected to the IP network 1, and the upper telephone connected to the IP network 2. Through the number server 2, the IP address and related information related to the telephone number “TEL2” managed by the upper telephone number server 2 can be acquired.
<Summary 2: Media communication between terminals>
Terminal 1 and terminal 2 use a telephone number to go through the IP network, and in the IP network, a communication path is established by a line connection control procedure in which a common line signal system is applied to the IP network, and the terminal is connected between the two terminals. Perform high-level communication start procedure. Next, inter-terminal media communication is performed, and when the inter-terminal media communication is completed, the communication path is released in the IP network by the line connection control procedure in which the common line signaling method is applied to the IP network, and the terminal high-level communication termination procedure is executed. Thus, multimedia communication can be performed. As the inter-terminal media communication, for example, an IP packet storing voice and image can be transmitted and received between the terminal 1 and the terminal 2 to perform voice image communication. When the inter-terminal media communication is terminated, the terminal 1 and the terminal 2 execute a terminal high-level communication termination procedure for terminating the established voice image communication path.
<< Relationship with Prior Patents and Prior Patents >>
In this embodiment, a method for performing fixed telephone communication and mobile telephone communication in the same IP network using a CIC management table based on the No. 7 common line signaling system and including the UNI management function on the terminal side, and A terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method which is a mobile telephone is disclosed. A multimedia inter-terminal communication that performs inter-terminal communication connection control based on a common line signaling system, and a method of communicating by dynamically setting a communication record used for IP encapsulation or the like are disclosed. In the prior patent (Patent No. 3084681), an IP communication network based on the IP encapsulation technique, that is, an external packet sent from a terminal becomes an internal packet based on the management of the device control table of the network node device on the transmission side. An IP network is disclosed in which a packet is transferred inside a communication network, and the internal packet is restored to an external packet in a network node device on the called side to reach another terminal. Further, in the tenth embodiment (FIGS. 135 to 160) of the prior application (2001-078270), inter-terminal communication connection control between a fixed telephone and a fixed telephone that does not include a UNI management function is disclosed.

9. Ninth Embodiment for Implementing Safe ASP:
Using the first function (encapsulation and decapsulation function) and the second function (protocol filter and port filter) of the network node device described in another embodiment, the ASP server and the user program A method of safely implementing the ASP service by selecting IP packets transmitted and received between them and excluding non-designated IP packets will be described.

  In FIG. 208, 1000 is an IP network, 1001 is an ASP site, 1003 and 1004 are terminals having an IP packet transmission / reception function, 1005 to 1007 are network node devices, and 1011 to 1014 are user programs. The ASP site 1001 includes an ASP server 1008, an ASP site program 1009, a WWW program 1010, and a database 1026. The network node devices 1005 to 1007 include device control tables 1015 to 1017, the device control table 1015 includes communication records 1018 and 1019, and filter control records 1022 and 1023. The device control table 1016 includes communication records 1020 and filter control. The device control table 1017 includes a record 1024, and the device control table 1017 includes a communication record 1021 and a filter control record 1025. The network node devices 1005 to 1007 are connected via communication lines and routers and can send and receive IP packets to each other.

The bit position “01” (protocol filter 1, outgoing permission) and the bit position “02” (protocol filter 2, incoming permission) of the control item CTL of the communication records 1018 to 1020 are both “1”. Further, the bit position “05” (port filter 1) of the control item CTL of the communication record 1018 is “1”, and the bit position “05” (port filter 1) and the bit position of the control item CTL of the communication record 1019 are set. “06” (port filter 2) is “1”, the bit position “06” (port filter 2) of the control item CTL of the communication record 1020 is “1”, and the control item of the communication record 1021 The bit position “05” (port filter 1) and the bit position “06” (port filter 2) of the CTL are “1”. In FIGS. 209 to 211, 1024-1, 1022-1, 1023-1 are protocol control records applied to the protocol filter 1, and 1024-2, 1022-2, 1023-2 are protocols applied to the protocol filter 2. Control records 1024-3, 1023-3, 1023-3 through 1023-5, and 1025-1 through 1025-3 are port control records. The filter control record 1025 includes port control records 1025-1 to 1025-3, and does not include a protocol control record.
<< Transmission from Terminal 1003 to ASP Site 1001 >>
Reference numeral 1001-1 (in FIG. 212) denotes a range of communication procedures in the IP network 1000. Although the port number “5000” of the ASP server 1008 is determined in advance by the client server model, the source port number “8200” in the external packet 1031 (FIG. 213) transmitted by the user program 1011 as the client is determined at the start of communication. ing. The external packet 1031 transmitted from the user program 1011 is input to the network node device 1006 via the communication line (step R1 in FIG. 212), converted into an internal packet using the communication record 1020 and the filter control record 1024, The internal packet reaches the network node device 1005 via the internal communication line or the router (step R2), and the external packet is restored and restored by using the communication record 1018 and the filter control record 1022 in the network node device 1005. The external packet reaches the ASP server 1008 via the communication line (step R3).

  When forming the internal packet, the protocol filter 1 (bit position “01”) of the control item CTL of the communication record 1020 in the network node device 1006 on the transmission side is “1”, so the header 1031 of the external packet 1031 is set. It is checked whether the protocol item value “1” in 1 is included in the protocol control record 1024-1 (FIG. 209). In this case, since “6” is included in the protocol control record 1024-1, the inspection of the protocol filter 1 has passed (transmission permitted), and the port filter 2 (bit) of the control item CTL of the communication record 1020 Since the position “06”) is “1”, whether or not the destination port number “5000” in the payload 1031-2 of the external packet 1031 is included in the port control record 1024-3 (FIG. 209). Find out. In this case, since the port number “5000” is included, the inspection of the port filter 2 (destination port number at the time of transmission) is passed. Note that when the protocol filter inspection and the port filter inspection fail for all other communication records, an internal packet is not formed.

Next, when the external packet is restored from the internal packet, the protocol filter 2 (bit position “02”) of the control item CTL of the communication record 1018 in the incoming network node device 1005 is “1”. Then, it is checked whether or not the protocol item value “6” (TCP) in the header 1031-1 of the external packet 1031 obtained by the restoration is included in the protocol control record 1022-2 (FIG. 210). In this case, since “6” is included in the protocol control record 1022-2, the inspection of the protocol filter 2 has passed (incoming call acceptance), and the port filter 1 (in the control item CTL of the communication record 1018) ( Since the bit position “05”) is “1”, the destination port number “5000” in the payload 1031-2 of the external packet 1031 obtained by restoration is included in the port control record 1022-3 (FIG. 210). It is checked whether it is included. In this case, since the port number “5000” is included, the inspection of the port filter 1 (destination port number at the time of incoming call) is passed. When the protocol filter inspection and the port filter inspection all fail including other communication records, the external packet is not formed from the internal packet.
<< Reply from ASP site 1001 to terminal 1003 >>
The external packet 1032 (in FIG. 213) sent from the ASP site 1001 is input to the network node device 1005 via the communication line (step R4), and converted into an internal packet using the communication record 1018 and the filter control record 1022. The internal packet reaches the network node device 1006 via the communication line or the router (step R5), and the external packet is restored and restored by using the communication record 1020 and the filter control record 1024 in the network node device 1006. The external packet reaches the terminal 1003 via the communication line (step R6).

  When forming the internal packet, the protocol filter 1 (bit position “01”) of the control item CTL of the communication record 1018 in the network node device 1005 on the transmission side is “1”, so the header 1032 of the external packet 1032 It is checked whether the protocol item value “6” in 1 is included in the protocol control record 1022-1 (FIG. 210). In this case, since “6” is included in the protocol control record 1022-1, the inspection of the protocol filter 1 has passed (transmission permitted), and the bit position “05” of the control item CTL of the communication record 1018 Since (Port Filter 1) is “1”, whether or not the source port number “5000” in the payload 1032-2 of the external packet 1032 is included in the port control record 1022-3 (FIG. 210). Examine. In this case, since the port number “5000” is included, the inspection of the port filter 1 (source port number at the time of transmission) is passed.

When the external packet is restored, since the protocol filter 2 (bit position “02”) of the control item CTL of the communication record 1020 in the network node device 1006 on the called side is “1”, the restored external packet It is checked whether or not the protocol item value “6” in the header 1032-1 of 1032 is included in the protocol control record 1024-2 (FIG. 209). In this case, since “6” is included in the protocol control record 1024-2, the inspection of the protocol filter 2 has passed (accepting incoming call), and then the bit position “of the control item CTL in the communication record 1020” Since “06” (port filter 2) is “1”, whether or not the source port number “5000” in the payload 1032-2 of the external packet 1032 to be restored is included in the port control record 1024-3. Find out. In this case, since the port number “5000” is included, the inspection of the port filter 2 (source port number at the time of incoming call) is passed.
<< Communication of other programs between terminal 1003 and ASP site 1001 >>
By the client-server communication technique described above, the program 1012 in the terminal 1003 can communicate with the WWW program 1010 having the port number “80” in the ASP site 1001 as a server. That is, the external packet 1033 is transmitted from the program 1012 to the WWW program 1010, and the external packet 1034 is transmitted from the WWW program 1010 to the program 1012. At this time, 1024-1, 1024-2, 1022-1, 1022-2 are used as the protocol control record, and 1024-3 and 1022-3 are used as the port control record.
<< Communication between Terminal 1004 and ASP Site 1001 >>
By the same technique as the client-server communication between the user program 1011 and the ASP server 1008 described above, the program 1013 in the terminal 1004 serves as a client as the network node device 1007, the IP network 900, the network node device 1005. It is possible to communicate with the ASP server 1008 via. 1023-1 and 1023-2 are used as the protocol control records in the network node device 1005, and 1023-3 and 1025-1 are used as the port control records.

In the above-described embodiment, the filter control record 1025 in the network node device 1007 does not include a protocol control record. In the process in which the port control records 1025-1 to 1025-3 are used, the protocol does not include a port number. When an external packet or an internal packet having is detected, the external packet or the internal packet is discarded. The program 1014 in the terminal 1004 can communicate as a client via the network node device 1007, the IP network 900, and the network node device 1005, using the program 1009 in the ASP site 1001 as a server according to the same principle as described above. Further, the relationship between the client and the server can be reversed, that is, communication can be performed according to the same principle as described above via the IP network with the program 1014 as the server having the port number “25” and the program 1009 as the client. The program 1009 transmits the IP packet 1035 having the destination port number “25” (in FIG. 213) to the program 1014, and the program 1014 programs the IP packet 1036 having the source port number “25” (in FIG. 213). Reply to 1009.
<< Method of communicating with ASP site using user's terminal program as server >>
In FIG. 214, 1040 is an IP network, 1045 is an ASP site, and 1046 to 1048 are terminals having an IP packet transmission / reception function. The ASP site 1045 includes an ASP site program 1054, and the terminals 1046 to 1048 include terminal programs 1055 to 1057, respectively. Each of the network node devices 1041 to 1044 includes a communication record for managing encapsulation and decapsulation, and filter control records 1041-1 to 1044-1 for determining a packet selection method. The filter control record 1041-1 includes a plurality of filter control records for the terminals 1046 to 1048. In this case, the source port number of the packet transmitted by the terminal programs 1055 to 1057 is “5000”, and each terminal program operates as a server in the client server model. The ASP site program 1054 is a client server model. To act as a client in

  1040-1 (in FIG. 216) indicates a range of communication procedures in the IP network 1040. The IP packet 1050 (in FIG. 215) sent from the ASP site program 1054 includes a TCP packet, has a source port number “7100” and a destination port number “5000”, and reaches the network node device 1041 (FIG. 216). Step T1). Then, the IP packet 1050 is inspected using the filter control record 1041-1. When the destination port number “5000” passes, it becomes an internal packet and is transferred through the IP network to reach the network node device 1042 (step T2). ), The filter control record 1042-1 is used to inspect the internal packet. If the destination port number “5000” passes, the external packet is restored from the internal packet, and the restored external packet 1050 reaches the terminal program 1055 via the communication line (step T3). When an IP packet is transmitted from the terminal program 1055 (step T4), the IP packet selected as the source port number “5000” using the filter control record 1042-1 in the network node device 1042 becomes an internal packet. The packet is transferred through the IP network (step T5). The network node device 1041 uses the filter control record 1041-1 to restore the external IP packet from the selected internal packet whose source port number is “5000”, and the restored external IP packet is sent to the ASP site program 1054. Reach (step T6).

Further, the IP packet 1051 sent from the ASP site program 1054 includes a TCP packet (step T11), has a source port number “8100” and a destination port number “5000”. The filter control record 1041- 1 is used to inspect the IP packet 1051, and the internal packet is transferred through the IP network (step T12). In the network node device 1043, the internal packet is inspected by using the filter control record 1043-1, and the restored external packet 1051 reaches the terminal program 1056 via the communication line (step T13). When an IP packet is transmitted from the terminal program 1056, the filter control record 1043-1 is used in the network node device 1043, an internal packet is formed and transferred, and the filter control record 1041-1 is used in the network node device 1041. Thus, the restored external IP packet reaches the ASP site program 1054 (step T14 to step T16). Further, the IP packet 1052 sent from the ASP site program 1054 includes a TCP packet (step T21), which has a source port number “9100” and a destination port number “5000”. Similarly to the above, the filter control record 1041-1 is The IP packet 1052 is used and inspected, and an internal packet is formed and transferred (step T22). In the network node device 1044, the internal packet is inspected using the filter control record 1044-1, and the restored external packet 1052 reaches the terminal program 1057 via the communication line (step T23). When an IP packet is transmitted from the terminal program 1057, the restored external IP packet reaches the ASP site program 1054 using the filter control record 1044-1 and the filter control record 1041-1 based on the same principle as described above. (Step T24 to Step T26).
<< LAN rental service >>
In FIG. 217, 1060 is an IP network, 1061 to 1063 are lending LANs, 1064 is a range accommodating LANs 1061 to 1063 lent by a LAN lending business company, 1065 is an ASP site, 1066 to 1070 are terminals, 1071 to 1076 are Network node devices, 1085 to 1089 are LANs, and 1080 to 1084 are collections of communication records as the main table of the device control table and various control records as sub-tables, for example, 742-1 to 742-6 shown in FIG. It is a form. In this embodiment, a pair of a communication record as a main table and various control records as a sub table will be described as simply a communication record.

A LAN 1085 and a LAN 1087 are LANs of company A and include terminals 1066 and 1068 inside. Company A borrows LAN 1061 from a LAN lending business company. The LAN 1061 includes various resources used by the company A (server, database, application program, domain name server, data storage device (data storage), etc.). The terminal 1066 can use various resources inside the LAN 1061 via a communication line (step 1091 in FIG. 218). Similarly, the terminal 1068 can use various resources inside the LAN 1061 via a communication line (step 1092). . Communication records 1080 and 1081 in the device control table are used for communication between the terminal 1066 and the resources in the LAN 1061 (step 1091). Further, the communication records 1082 and 1083 in the device control table are used for communication between the terminal 1068 and the resources in the LAN 1061 (step 1092). Since other communication records for communicating with the resources in the LAN 1061 are not set in the network node device 1074 and other network node devices, the company A can use the LAN 1061 exclusively. Company A only needs to own terminals 1066 and 1068 for accessing LAN 1061, and there is a merit that it does not require a specialist engineer for maintaining and managing LAN 1061 servers and a room for accommodating LAN 1061 resources. is there.
<< Joint use of ASP site >>
The ASP site 1065 can include various application servers, WEB servers, databases, data storages, and the like. 1086 is a LAN of company X, including terminal 1067, 1088 is a LAN of company Y, including terminal 1069, 1089 is a LAN of company Z, and includes terminal 1070.

Company X can send and receive IP packets to and from ASP site 1065 and use internal resources of ASP site 1065 (step 1093 in FIG. 218), and company Y can send and receive IP packets to and from ASP site 1065 to return to the ASP site. 1065 resources can be used (step 1094), and company Z can send and receive IP packets to and from the ASP site 1065 and use the ASP site 1065 resources (step 1095). That is, the company X to the company Z can use the ASP site 1065 jointly. Since other communication records for communicating with the ASP site 1065 are not set inside other network node devices, the three companies, Company X to Company Z, can use the ASP site exclusively for their own company. If the company X to the company Z are banks, application programs that can be commonly used by the banks can be jointly used in the ASP site. If company X to company Z are insurance companies, application programs that can be used in common by insurance companies can be jointly installed and used in ASP site 1065. By considering the company X to the company Z as an industry, it is possible to enumerate an unlimited number of companies such as the automobile industry, the construction industry, and the travel industry.
<< Provision of borrowed LAN ASP >>
The company A borrows the LAN 1061 and makes various resources in the LAN 1061 available to the third party as ASP servers from the terminals 1066 and 1068 of the company A. Next, the terminals 1067 and 1069 of the company X to the company Z are used. Each of 1070 requests the communication company operating the IP network 1060 to set the communication record of the related network mode device so that the resources in the LAN 1061 can be used as a server. Then, the company A can provide the ASP service to the companies X to Z by borrowing the LAN 1061, that is, without owning the LAN for the ASP service.
<< Summary >>
The IP network includes two or more network node devices, and programs in the ASP site transmit external packets to one or more user terminals. The external packets are transmitted from the logical terminal at the end of the external communication line 1 to the calling side. An internal packet is formed from the selected external packet input to the network node device, the internal packet is transferred inside the communication network, and the internal packet is transmitted from the selected internal packet to the external packet in the network node device on the receiving side. Is an IP network that is restored and sent to the external communication line 2. At least one of the protocol and the port number in the external IP packet is used when the internal packet is formed or at least when the external IP packet is restored, and the ASP is transmitted from the user terminal. An IP packet can be returned to a program in the site, the programs in the ASP site operate as a client-server model client, the user terminal program operates as a client-server model server, and the IP between the ASP site and the terminal The communication security of packet transfer is improved.

  The selected packet is an external IP packet, and the programs in the ASP site operate as a client server model client, and the user terminal program operates as a client server model server. And improve the security of the program. The network node device inside the IP network has a case where the encapsulation function is used and a case where the address check function using registration information in the network node device is used, which can be implemented respectively.

Further, when company A uses a LAN via an IP network and borrows the LAN, IP packets can be transmitted and received between the company A terminal and the resources in the borrowed LAN. A communication record is set in a device control table in a network node device in the network, and it is impossible to send and receive IP packets between a terminal that is not a company A terminal and a resource in the borrowed LAN. A LAN lending business company can lend a LAN without setting a communication record in the device control table in all network node devices. In addition, since company X to company Z send and receive IP packets to and from the ASP site, a communication record is set in the device control table in the network node device in the IP network. Two or more companies can jointly use the ASP site without setting a communication record that enables transmission and reception of packets to all network node devices. The ASP can provide an ASP service using the borrowed LAN.
<< Encapsulation function and address inspection function >>
The network node device inside the IP network uses the encapsulation function, and the external IP packet becomes an internal packet. The packet is transferred inside the communication network, and is decapsulated by the network node device on the receiving side to convert the external IP packet. The network node device performs one or more of packet priority control, multicast control, and signature function to further improve the information security of the communication network of the IP network, and to share the LAN lending service and ASP site ( Terminal socket communication). Further, in the network node device inside the IP network, the encapsulation function is not used, and the packet selected by the address inspection using the registration information in the network node device described in the seventh embodiment (FIG. 206, etc.) Is transferred inside the communication network. At this time, the network node apparatus further improves the information security of the communication network by performing one or more of packet priority control, multicast control, and signature function as well as performing address inspection, and can improve the LAN lending service and ASP site. Shared use (terminal socket communication) can be implemented.

10. Tenth embodiment for transmitting multicast data to a mobile terminal:
FIG. 219 shows the IP network 300-1 for distributing multicast data, and is a diagram obtained by partially rewriting FIG. 21 (Example 3) for explaining the distribution of multicast data. In preparation for the explanation of FIG. 219, the distribution of the multicast data data of FIG. 21 is summarized.

  FIG. 21 shows a flow of multicast data. When an external IP packet is transmitted from the terminal 320, the IP packet reaches the network node device 311 and is transferred to the routers 317 and 319 as an internal packet. The internal packet transferred to the router 317 is transferred to the network node device 312 and the router 318, and the internal packet transferred to the network node device 312 is restored to an external IP packet and transferred to the terminal 322. The internal packet that has reached the router 318 is transferred to the network node devices 313 and 314, and the internal packet that has reached the network node device 313 is restored to an external IP packet and reaches the terminal 323. The internal packet that reaches the network node device 314 is restored to an external IP packet and reaches the terminal 325. On the other hand, the internal packet transmitted from the network node device 311 and reaching the router 319 is transferred to reach the network node device 315, restored to an external IP packet, and reaches the terminal 327. The address management table in the network node device is used for the encapsulation from the external IP packet to the internal packet and the decapsulation from the internal packet to the external IP packet. Terminals 320 to 327 are also called fixed terminals because they have a single connected network node device, and are called fixed telephones when used as telephones. A terminal used for mobile communication, which will be described later, is also called a mobile terminal, and when used as a telephone, it is called a mobile telephone. The mobile terminal has a telephone number that can identify the mobile terminal.

  Next, the flow of multicast data by the IP network 300-1 (FIG. 219) will be described. There are network node devices 311 to 315 in the IP network 300-1, and the terminals 320 to 327 are connected to the network node device via communication lines, and that multicast data is transmitted from the terminal 320 as shown in FIG. It is the same. The difference from FIG. 21 is that the terminals 321, 324 and 326 receive multicast data. In the IP network 300-1, the address management tables of the network node devices 311 to 315 include records 331-1 to 335-1 (FIG. 220) that define multicast delivery routes, respectively, and the router 317 determines the internal IP packet delivery destination. A multicast table 337-1 (in FIG. 221) is included as a route table element, the router 318 includes a multicast table 338-1 as a route table element, and the router 319 includes a multicast table 339-1 as a route table element.

  In order to add the receiving terminals 321, 324, and 326, the record of the address management table in the network node device and the record of the route table of the router are changed. The multicast record (first row) of the address management table 331 (in FIG. 24) in the network node device 311 is added with a logical output interface “G00” to the terminal 321 and 331-1 (in FIG. 220). As shown in FIG. 4, the record is changed to “I01, E01, M1, IM1, (G02, G03, G00), 0”, and further becomes the record “IM1, M1, E01, I01, G00, F02”. “G00” indicates the internal logical output interface of the network node device 311 and is a return line in the sense that the output of the network node device 311 returns to the input.

  The multicast record (first row) in the address management table 332 (in FIG. 24) in the network node device 312 is the same as the record 332-1. The multicast record (second line) in the address management table 333 (in FIG. 26) in the network node device 313 adds a logical output interface “F11” to the terminal 324, and records 333-1 “IM1, M1, E01, I01, G31, (F10, F11) ”. The multicast record (first row) in the address management table 334 (in FIG. 26) in the network node device 314 is the same as the record 334-1. The multicast record (second line) in the address management table 335 (in FIG. 26) in the network node device 315 adds the logical output interface “F17” to the terminal 326 and records 335-1 “IM1, M1, E01. , I01, G31, (F17, F18) ".

  The address management table described in the third embodiment is included as a function of the device control table disclosed in the seventh embodiment, and will be described with reference to FIG. In 332-1x (FIG. 222), the first row (upper row) shows the communication record 738 (in FIG. 46), and the second row (lower row) is the record 332-1 in the address management table (FIG. 220). (Inside) items are shown with different positions before and after, “ISA” and “IM1”, “IRA” and “I01”, “NSA” and “M1”, “NDA” and “E01”, “MSA” And “one”, “MDA” and “one”, “IFI” and “G04”, and “IFE” and “F04” can be associated with each other. That is, it is an item used for the same purpose. Here, “one” indicates 255.255.255.255 (in the case of IPv4).

  FIG. 223 shows a state in which media routers 320M to 327M are installed between a network node device in the IP network 300-1 and a terminal outside the IP network 300-1. The media router has a function of accommodating a plurality of terminals having an IP packet transmission / reception function and connecting to a network node apparatus, and is implemented as 903-1 (FIG. 92) in the present invention. Referring to FIG. 223, an IP packet including multicast data is transmitted from the terminal 320 and reaches the network node device 311 via the media router 320M. In the network node device 311, the address management table record 331- The record “I01, E01, M1, IM1, (G02, G03, G00), 0” in the first row of 1 is used as an internal packet. Then, the internal packet is transferred to the router 317 connected to the communication line designated by the item “G02” in the record, transferred to the router 319 connected to the communication line designated by the item “G03”, and transferred to the communication line designated by the item “G00”. It is transferred (turned back) to the network node device 311 to be connected.

  The internal packet transferred to the router 317 is transferred to the router 318 connected to the communication line designated by “G12” using the items “G11” and “G12” in the routing table 337-1, The data is transferred to the network node device 312 connected to the communication line designated by the item “G11”. The internal packet transferred to the router 318 is transferred to the network node device 313 connected to the communication line designated by “G27” using the items “G27” and “G28” in the routing table 338-1. At the same time, it is transferred to the network node device 314 connected to the communication line designated by the item “G28”. On the other hand, the internal packet transferred to the router 319 is transferred to the network node device 315 connected to the communication line designated by “G22” using the item “G22” in the route table 339-1.

  The internal packet that has arrived at the network node device 311 is restored using the record “IM1, M1, E01, I01, G00, F02” in the second row of the record 331-1 of the address management table, The restored external packet is transferred to the media router 321M connected to the communication line designated by the record item “F02”. The same applies to the following, and the records “IM1, M1, E01, I01,...” That are records 332-1 to 335-1 in the address management table are used as internal packets that have reached the network node devices 312 to 315. The external packet is restored, and the restored external packet is transferred to the media routers 322M to 327M connected to the communication lines designated by the record items "F04", "F10", "F11", ..., "F18". .

  Similar to the IP network 300-1 (FIG. 223), the IP network 300-2 (FIG. 224) has an address management table record for multicast delivery in the network node devices 311 through 315, and a routing table for multicast branching in the routers 317 through 318. Is set. Further, the media router 321M (FIG. 223) is replaced with a wireless base station 321B, and the media routers 323M to 327M (FIG. 223) are replaced with wireless base stations 323B to B327B (FIG. 224), respectively. 323B to B327B are installed inside the IP network 300-2. The arrow on the communication line indicates the multicast delivery route. The radio station has a function of accommodating a plurality of mobile terminals and connecting to the network node device, and is implemented as, for example, 902-3 (FIG. 92) in the present invention. Since the multicast delivery route set in the IP network 300-2 is the same as the multicast delivery route set in the IP network 300-1, the multicast IP packet sent from the terminal 320 is the media router 320M. To the IP network 300-2 and reach the fixed terminal 322 and the mobile terminals 321B, 323B to 327B via the multicast delivery route in the IP network 300-2.

  The IP network 1100 (FIG. 225) is an IP network formed by adding a server and a router to the IP network 300-2. The internal resources of the IP network 1100 and the IP network 300-2 correspond as follows. Network node devices 1101 to 1105 (FIG. 225) correspond to network node devices 311 to 315 (FIG. 224), respectively, and routers 1107, 1108, and 1109 (FIG. 225) correspond to routers 317, 318, and 319, respectively (FIG. 224). The communication line connection relationship between the network node device and the router also corresponds one-to-one. Fixed terminals 1120 and 1122 (FIG. 225) correspond to fixed terminals 320 and 322 (FIG. 224), respectively, and mobile terminals 1121, 1123 to 1127 correspond to mobile terminals 321B, 323B to 327B, respectively.

  An arrow on a communication line in the IP network 1100 indicates a multicast delivery route. Since the multicast delivery route in the IP network 1100 is set to be the same as the multicast delivery route in the IP network 300-2, the multicast IP packet sent from the terminal 1120 is input to the IP network 1100 via the media router 1110. Then, it reaches the fixed terminal 1122 and the mobile terminals 1121, 1123 to 1127 via the multicast delivery route in the IP network 1100.

  In FIG. 225, network node devices 1101 to 1105 are connected to termination control units 1131 to 1135, respectively. In addition, telephone number servers 1131-5 to 1135-5, telephone management servers 1131-4 to 1135-4, and table management servers 1131-3 to 1135-3 are installed inside the termination controllers 1131 to 1135. Reference numeral 1106 denotes a router, reference numeral 1136 denotes an upper telephone number server, reference numeral 1137 denotes a user service server, and reference numerals 1138 and 1139 denote multicast authentication servers (M authentication servers) for confirming the validity of the multicast receiving terminal of the mobile terminal. Termination control unit 1131, telephone management server 1131-4, telephone number server 1131-5, and upper telephone number server 1136 are the termination control unit 914-1, telephone management server 906-4, telephone number server 906 shown in FIG. -5, sharing the same functions as the upper telephone number server 995. The functions of the M authentication servers 1138 and 1139 will be described in this embodiment. Termination control units 1131 to 1135 are connected via a router and a communication line, and the communication line can transfer an internal packet or the like storing a line connection control message for telephone call control.

  The communication element shown in FIG. 92 and the communication element shown in FIG. 225 can correspond to each other as follows, for example. The telephone 905-1 (in FIG. 92) can be associated with the fixed telephone 1120 (in FIG. 225), the media router 903-1 can be associated with the media router 1110, and the network node apparatus 906-1 can be associated with the network node apparatus 1101. The termination control unit 914-1 can be associated with the termination control unit 1131, the communication line 912-1 can be associated with the communication line 1144, the connection control unit 914-4 can be associated with the termination control unit 1134, and the network Node device 909-1 can be associated with network node device 1104, radio base station 902-4 can be associated with radio base station 1115, and mobile phone 905-8 can be associated with mobile phone 1125.

  Further, the control communication line connecting the termination control unit 1131 (FIG. 225) to the communication line 1144, the router 1141, and the termination control unit 1134 is transmitted from the termination control unit 914-1 (FIG. 92) to the communication line 912-1 and the router 911-. 1 and a control communication line connecting the router 911-2, the router 911-3, and the termination control unit 914-4. A packet storing a line connection control message based on the common line signal system is transferred to the control communication line. Furthermore, media communication lines connecting the network node device 1101 (FIG. 225), the communication line 1145, the router 1107, the router 1108, and the network node device 1104 are the network node device 906-1 (FIG. 92), the communication line 913-1, It can be associated with a media communication line connecting the router 911-4, the router 911-5, the router 911-6, and the network node device 909-1. In addition to text data, telephone voice and image data, or multicast data including voice and image data, etc. are transferred to the media communication line.

As described with reference to FIG. 167, the fixed telephone 905-1 and the mobile telephone 905-8 can perform telephone communication by line connection control in which the common line signal system is applied to the IP network. With the association between the elements and the communication elements described in FIG. 225, the fixed telephone 1120 and the mobile telephone 1125 can perform telephone communication according to line connection control applied to the IP network in the common line signal system. By the same method as described above, for example, the telephone communication between the mobile telephone 1121 and the mobile telephone 1124 is possible, and the fixed telephone 1122 and the fixed telephone 1120 can be telephone communication.
<< Multicast reception request and reception end >>
A case will be described in which the mobile terminal 1121 transmits wireless radio wave information including a multicast reception request and happens to be connected to the wireless base station 1111 via the wireless communication line 1111-1 (FIG. 225). The radio base station 1111 first exchanges information with the mobile terminal 1121 and confirms the communication possibility of the radio communication path (step V1 in FIG. 226). This confirmation procedure is performed by communication layers 1 and 2. When the communication possibility is confirmed, the mobile terminal 1121 transmits a multicast reception request (step V2). The multicast reception request information includes a telephone number “TN3” used by the mobile terminal 1121, terminal authentication information “PID3”, and multicast reception terminal authentication information “PID-M” (such as a password). As the multicast receiving terminal authentication information, the terminal authentication information “PID3” and the second terminal authentication information “PID-M” set in the telephone number registration of the mobile telephone in the communication case 2 of the eighth embodiment are used. it can.

  The radio base station 1111 includes an external packet 1160 (FIG. 3) including the telephone number “TN3” included in the terminal authentication information “PID3”, the external IP address “EB1” of the mobile terminal 1121 and the second terminal authentication information “PID-M”. 227) and sent to the multicast authentication server 1138 (external IP address “WA9”). Here, the source external IP address “EB1” and the destination external IP address “WA9” of the external packet 1160 are shown. The external packet 1160 reaches the network node device 1101 (step V3), and the record “IB1, EB1, WA9, IWA9,...” In the third row of the address management table 1101-1 (FIG. 229) in the network node device 1101. Is used to form an internal packet 1161 (FIG. 228), and the internal packet 1161 is sent to the multicast authentication server 1138 (step V4). The multicast authentication server 1138 receives the internal packet 1161 and acquires the telephone number “TN3”, the external IP address “EB1”, the internal IP address “IB1”, and the multicast authentication terminal authentication information “PID-M” from the received internal packet. (Step V5), an internal packet including the telephone number “TN3” is formed and transmitted to the telephone number server 1131-5 (step V6). The telephone number server 1131-5 receives the acquired telephone number “1”. TN3 ″ is notified to the upper telephone number server 1136 together with the identification code of the telephone number server 1131-5 (step V7). The upper telephone number server 1136 extracts the multicast authentication terminal authentication information “PID-M” from the telephone number “TN3” held therein, and passes through the telephone number server 1131-5 (step V8). 1138 is notified (step V9). The authentication server 1138 checks whether or not the received information matches the telephone number “TN3” and the multicast authentication terminal authentication information “PID-M” received in step V4. Interrupts the following procedure.

  The multicast authentication server 1138 notifies the authentication result (pass or fail) to the mobile terminal 1121 via the network node device 1101 and the radio base station 1111 (steps V11 to V13). The mobile terminal 1121 can reply to the authentication result notification (step V13x, option). Further, in the case of a pass, the authentication server 1138 requests the table management server 1131-3 (step V15), and the second row record “1” of the address management table record 1101-1 (FIG. 229) in the network node device 1101. IM1, M1, E01, I01, G00, 0 "are rewritten to the record" IM1, M1, E01, I01, G00, F02 "shown in 1101-2 (step V16). That is, the sixth item “0” is rewritten to “F02”. Then, the external IP packet storing the multicast data transmitted from the fixed terminal 1120 passes through the media router 1110 (step V21), reaches the network node device 1101 (step V22), and is first in the address management table 1101-1. The record “I01, E01, M1, IM1, (G02, G03, G00), 0” on the line is used, and the internal packet returned by the item “G00” returns to the network node device 1101 (step V23). The IP packet storing the multicast data sent from the item “F02” to which the record 1101-2 “IM1, M1, E01, I01, G00, F02” in the network node device 1101 is applied is designated by “F02”. (Step V24), and then reaches the mobile terminal 1121 via the radio base station 1111 (step V25). Also, the multicast authentication server 1138 notifies the user service server 1137 of the start of transmission of multicast data to the terminal 1121 (step V17). The user service server 1137 can use the multicast data service reception report as charging information to the terminal 1121 (step V18, option).

The multicast data reception end procedure is performed as follows. The mobile terminal 1121 sends a multicast data reception end request to the radio base station 1111 (step V30). When the radio base station 1111 sends an external IP packet containing the multicast data reception end request, the external IP packet is sent to the network node device 1101. The packet is encapsulated to become a multicast data reception end request internal packet, and the multicast data reception end request internal packet is delivered to the multicast authentication server 1138 (step V32). The external IP packet including the multicast data reception end request includes the same contents as the external IP packet 1160 (FIG. 227), that is, the telephone number “TN3”, the external address “EB1”, the terminal authentication information, and the like. The internal IP packet including is the same as the internal IP packet 1161. When the multicast authentication server 1138 receives the internal IP packet including the multicast data reception end request, the multicast authentication server 1138 requests the table management server 1131-3 (step V33) to record in the address management table record 1101-2 in the network node device 1101. The content shown is rewritten to the content shown in 1101-3 (step V34), and transmission of IP packets including multicast data to the radio base station 1111 is suppressed, and the distribution stop of multicast data is reported to the user service server 1137 ( Step V35). The user service server 1137 can use the multicast data service reception report as charging information for the terminal 1121 (step V36, option). Further, the authentication server 1138 can report the result of the multicast data distribution suspension to the radio base station 1111 (steps V37x, V38x, option).
<< Transmission of multicast data from mobile terminal >>
Instead of transmitting an external packet including multicast data from the fixed terminal 1120, the multicast data is transmitted from the mobile terminal 1121 to the radio base station 1111 via the radio communication path 11111-1, and the received multicast data from the radio base station 1111 is transmitted. An external packet including the packet can be formed and transmitted to the network node device 1101 via the communication path 111-2, transferred inside the IP network 1100, and delivered to the fixed terminal 1122 and the mobile terminals 1123 to 1127. In other words, multicast data originating from the mobile terminal 1121 can be distributed. At this time, a record for determining a multicast delivery destination in the network node device or router is set and used based on the principle described with reference to FIGS.
<< Free multicast service >>
In the implementation of the multicast service, the free multicast service can be realized by omitting the authentication procedure for the multicast data receiving terminal and the procedure for charging the user service server. That is, in FIG. 226, steps V17, V18, V35, and V36 are not performed.
(Summary)
In the IP network, a record for multicast data distribution is set in advance in the address management table in the network node device, and a record for determining the multicast delivery destination is set in advance in the route table in the router. Send an external packet containing. The external packet reaches the network node device on the transmission side, becomes an internal packet according to the designation of the record in the address management table, is transferred to one or more internal communication lines, and when the transferred internal packet passes through the router According to the multicast data record in the router, the internal packet arrives at one or more receiving-side network node devices on the receiving terminal side, and the receiving-side network node device restores the external packet from the internal packet. The external packet including the restored multicast data is transferred from the network node device on the receiving side to the fixed terminal via the media router via the external communication line as the first case, and as the second case, the network node on the receiving side. It is transferred from the apparatus to the radio base station via the external communication line, and can be delivered to the mobile terminal via the radio communication path in the radio base station. Instead of transmitting multicast data from the fixed terminal, the multicast data is transmitted from the mobile terminal to the wireless base station via the wireless communication path, and the external packet including the received multicast data is formed from the wireless base station, It is also possible to distribute multicast data by transmitting it to the network node device and transferring the inside of the IP network 1100.

  When the mobile terminal issues a multicast reception request including at least multicast reception terminal authentication information, the reception request is requested to the multicast authentication server, and when the multicast authentication server permits the mobile terminal to receive multicast reception, the request is made to the table management server. The mobile terminal can be received by rewriting the multicast distribution record in the address management table of the network node device to which the mobile terminal is connected. That is, the multicast data is transferred to the reception request source mobile terminal by specifying the rewritten record. The multicast authentication server can notify the user service server that multicast data can be delivered and can also use it as billing information. When a multicast data reception end request is issued from the mobile terminal, the multicast authentication server knows the end request, and the multicast authentication server requests the table management server to rewrite the record of the address management table in the network node device, And stop the distribution of user service server multicast data. A free multicast service can also be implemented.

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating communication between a mobile communication network and an IP network in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the communication connection control method between terminals via a mobile communication network and IP network in 1st Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the form of the IP packet used in inter-terminal communication connection control in 1st Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the form of the IP packet used in inter-terminal communication connection control in 1st Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the form of the IP packet used in inter-terminal communication connection control in 1st Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the form of the IP packet used in inter-terminal communication connection control in 1st Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the form of the IP packet used in inter-terminal communication connection control in 1st Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the form of the IP packet used in inter-terminal communication connection control in 1st Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the form of the IP packet used in inter-terminal communication connection control in 1st Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the form of the IP packet used in inter-terminal communication connection control in 1st Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method via a mobile communication network and IP network in 1st Example of this invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating communication between a mobile communication network and an IP network in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method via a mobile communication network and IP network in 1st Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the hierarchical structure of a communication function in 2nd Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the application method of TCP technique in 2nd Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the application method of TCP technique in 2nd Example of this invention. In 2nd Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the communication between 2 terminals via an IP network. It is a figure explaining line connection control in a TCP session in the 2nd example of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the format of a TCP header in the second embodiment of the present invention. In the 3rd Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the IP network to which a multicast technique is applied. In the third embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram illustrating a multicast technique. In the third embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram illustrating a multicast technique. In the third embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram illustrating a multicast technique. In the 3rd Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the mode of the transfer of the multicast packet by a multicast technique. In the 3rd Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the mode of the transfer of the multicast packet by a multicast technique. In the 3rd Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the mode of the transfer of the multicast packet by a multicast technique. In 4th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the structure of a relay gateway. In 4th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the structure of a relay gateway. In the 5th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining a mode that an IP packet is transferred via IP network. In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining the association between a 28-bit length address and a 128-bit length address. In the 5th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the relationship between an external IP packet and an internal packet. In the 5th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the relationship between an external IP packet and an internal packet. In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining the association between a 28-bit length address and a 128-bit length address. In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining the association between a 28-bit length address and a 128-bit length address. In the 5th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the relationship between an external IP packet and an internal packet. In the 5th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the relationship between an external IP packet and an internal packet. In the 5th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the relationship between an external IP packet and an internal packet. It is a figure explaining a mode that an IP packet is transferred via IP network in 6th Example of this invention. In the sixth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the external IP packet and the internal frame. In the sixth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the external IP packet and the internal frame. In the sixth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the external IP packet and the internal frame. In the sixth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the external IP packet and the internal frame. It is a figure explaining the relationship between a communication network and a network node apparatus in 7th Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the relationship between an IP network and a network node apparatus in 7th Example of this invention. In 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the relationship between a network node apparatus and the termination | terminus gateway which appears in another Example or a prior application. In a 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the format of a communication record. In the seventh embodiment of the present invention, the format of the communication record is expressed in the program language C. FIG. In the 7th example of the present invention, it is an example of a device conversion table which consists of a plurality of communication records. In 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure showing the flow of a process of the network node apparatus at the time of transmission. In 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure showing the flow of a process of the network node apparatus at the time of an incoming call. It is a figure explaining the method to refer to a subtable from the main table in 7th Example of this invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a format of a protocol filter control record in the seventh embodiment of the present invention. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure showing the format of a port filter control record. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the whole flow in packet priority control. In the seventh embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram representing the format of a priority control record. In the seventh embodiment of the present invention, the format of the priority control record is expressed in the programming language C. FIG. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of a some priority control record. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the flow of the whole multicast. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of a multicast control record. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the other example of a multicast control record. It is a figure explaining the overflow line control in a multicast in the 7th Example of this invention. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the further another example of a multicast control record. It is a figure explaining the multicast control function 2 in 7th Example of this invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a format 4 of a second multicast control record used for implementing the multicast control function 2 in the seventh embodiment of the present invention. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is an example of the apparatus conversion table | surface which consists of several communication records used in order to implement a multicast control function the 2nd. In 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the procedure which transmits / receives multicast data in the multicast control function 2 in it. In 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the method of a reception report in a multicast control function 2nd. In the seventh embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining the overall flow of the electronic signature. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a format of an electronic signature control record in the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the method which isolate | separates the inside of IP network into several internal IP network in 7th Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the function of the apparatus control table for isolate | separating the inside of an IP network into a some internal IP network in 7th Example of this invention. In the 7th example of the present invention, it is a figure explaining other methods for finding various control records from a communication record. In the 7th example of the present invention, it is a figure explaining other methods for finding various control records from a communication record. It is a figure which shows the other format of a communication record in 7th Example of this invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an external IP packet is converted into an IPv6 format internal packet and transferred in the seventh embodiment of the present invention. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is an example of the internal packet of an IPv6 format. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the format of the communication record which is an internal packet of an IPv6 format. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an external IP packet is converted into a MAC format internal frame and transferred in the seventh embodiment of the present invention. In 7th Example of this invention, it is an example of the internal frame of a MAC format. In 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the format of the communication record which is an example of the internal frame of a MAC format. It is a figure which shows the example in which the internal packet formed by attaching a tag to an external packet is transferred in 7th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the communication record with respect to the internal packet formed by attaching a tag to an external packet in 7th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example converted into the internal packet of the other format formed by attaching a tag to an external packet, and transferred in 7th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the communication record with respect to the internal packet of the other format formed by attaching | subjecting a tag to an external packet in 7th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example converted into the MAC frame with an extension tag, and transferred in 7th Example of this invention. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the structure of a MAC frame and a MAC frame with an extension tag. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of the communication record with respect to the MAC frame with an extension tag. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example converted into an MPLS frame and transferred. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the communication record for MPLS frames. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example converted into an HDLC frame and transferred. In the 7th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the communication record for HDLC frame frames. In the 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the communication between multimedia terminals using the method of implementing fixed telephone communication and mobile telephone communication in the same IP network, and also using a telephone number. In the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the method of implementing communication from a fixed telephone to a fixed telephone in an IP network. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the network node apparatus from the media router of a calling side in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the proxy telephone server from the network node apparatus in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the telephone management server from the proxy telephone server in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the calling side CIC management table | surface in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet sent to the telephone number server from the telephone management server in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet sent in response to the telephone management server from the telephone number server in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention, it is another figure which shows the example of the CIC management table | surface of a calling party. It is a figure which shows a UNI search table | surface in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IAM message sent to the telephone management server of a call side from the telephone management server of a calling side. In the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of the CIC management table | surface of an incoming call side. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the proxy telephone server from the telephone management server in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the network node apparatus from the proxy telephone server in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the media router from the network node apparatus in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the ACM message sent to the telephone management server of a calling side from the telephone management server of a calling side in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the network node apparatus from the media router of a call side. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the proxy telephone server from the network node apparatus in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the telephone management server from the proxy telephone server in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the CPG message sent to the telephone management server of a calling side from the telephone management server of a receiving side. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the proxy telephone server from the calling side telephone management server in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the network node apparatus from the proxy telephone server in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the media router from the network node apparatus in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the ANM message sent to the telephone management server of a calling side from the telephone management server of a calling side in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the external IP packet transferred to the media router of a call side from the media router of a call side. In the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the state by which the IP packet transferred from the call side media router to the call side media router was encapsulated in the internal packet. In the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the REL message sent to the telephone management server of a call side from the telephone management server of a calling side. In the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the RLC message sent to the telephone management server of a calling side from the telephone management server of a calling side. It is a figure which shows Example 1 of an apparatus control table used in the communication case 1 thru | or the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 of an apparatus control table used in the communication case 1 thru | or the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 3 of an apparatus control table used in the communication case 1 thru | or communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 4 of an apparatus control table used in the communication case 1 thru | or the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the call management table used in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the incoming call management table | surface used in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. In the 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining collection of the CIC information by the operation management server. In the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention, it is the 1st figure of 2 sheets which shows the method of implementing the communication from a mobile telephone to a mobile telephone in an IP network. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is the 2nd figure 2nd figure which shows the method of implementing the communication from a mobile telephone to a mobile telephone in an IP network. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the network node apparatus from the radio base station by the side of a call in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the proxy telephone server from the network node apparatus in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the telephone management server from the proxy telephone server in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of the CIC management table | surface of a calling side. It is a figure which shows the IP packet sent to the telephone number server from the telephone management server in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet sent in response to the telephone management server from the telephone number server in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of the CIC management table | surface of a calling side. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of the IP packet containing the authentication request information transferred to a proxy telephone server from a telephone management server. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of the IP packet containing the authentication request information transferred to a network node apparatus from a proxy telephone server. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of the IP packet containing the authentication request information transferred to a wireless base station from a network node apparatus. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of the IP packet containing the authentication reply information transferred to a network node apparatus from a wireless base station. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of the IP packet containing the authentication reply information transferred to a proxy telephone server from a network node apparatus. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of the IP packet containing the authentication reply information transferred to a telephone management server from a proxy telephone server. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IAM message sent to the telephone management server of a call side from the telephone management server of a calling side. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example of the CIC management table | surface of an incoming call side. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred from the telephone management server to a proxy telephone server in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the network node apparatus from the proxy telephone server in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to a radio base station from a network node apparatus. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet containing the authentication request information transferred to a network node apparatus from a wireless base station. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet containing the authentication request information transferred to a proxy telephone server from a network node apparatus. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet containing the authentication request information transferred from a proxy telephone server to a telephone management server. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet containing the terminal authentication pass / failure transferred from a telephone management server to a proxy telephone server. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet containing the terminal authentication pass / failure transferred to a network node apparatus from a proxy telephone server. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet containing the terminal authentication pass / failure transferred to a wireless base station from a network node apparatus. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the ACM message sent to the telephone management server of a calling side from the telephone management server of a calling side. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the network node apparatus from the radio | wireless base station of an incoming call side. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the proxy telephone server from the network node apparatus in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the telephone management server from the proxy telephone server in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the CPG message sent to the telephone management server of a calling side from the telephone management server of a receiving side. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred from a calling side telephone management server to a proxy telephone server. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the network node apparatus from the proxy telephone server in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to a radio base station from a network node apparatus. It is a figure which shows the ANM message sent to the telephone management server of a calling side from the telephone management server of a calling side in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred from the calling-side radio base station to the called-side radio base station in the communication case 2 of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. In the communication case 2 of the 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the state by which the IP packet transferred from the calling-side radio base station to the called-side radio base station was encapsulated in the internal packet. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the REL message sent to the telephone management server of a call side from the telephone management server of a calling side. In the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the RLC message sent to the telephone management server of a calling side from the telephone management server of a calling side. In the communication case 3 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the method of implementing communication from a mobile telephone to a fixed telephone in an IP network. In the communication case 4 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the method of implementing communication from a fixed telephone to a mobile telephone in an IP network. It is a figure explaining the relationship between a mobile telephone and a wireless base station in the communication case 2 thru | or communication case 4 of 8th Example of this invention. In the 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the Example of the channel-IP address correspondence table | surface inside a wireless base station. In the eighth embodiment of the present invention, a control signal or a voice signal sent from an analog mobile telephone is shown in a state in which it is IP-encapsulated and transferred by a radio base station. In the eighth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram showing a state in which an IP packet including control or voice transmitted from an IP mobile phone is transferred via a radio base station. In the eighth embodiment of the present invention, an IP packet including control or voice transmitted from an IP mobile telephone is transferred through a radio base station. In the communication case 5 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the method of implementing communication from a multimedia terminal to a multimedia terminal in an IP network. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a multimedia terminal and IP network in the communication case 5 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 5 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the outline of the flow of communication from a multimedia terminal to a multimedia terminal. It is a figure which shows the protocol stack in the communication between multimedia terminals in the communication case 5 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the communication connection procedure between other IP terminals from an IP terminal. In the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the other communication connection procedure between other IP terminals from an IP terminal. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred from a media router to a network node apparatus in the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the proxy telephone server from the network node apparatus in the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred from a proxy telephone server to a telephone management server in the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet containing the question content to a telephone management server. It is a figure which shows IP packet containing the reply from a telephone management server in the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the CIC management table | surface of the transmission side in the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred from the telephone management server to another telephone management server in the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the CIC management table | surface of the receiving side in the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the proxy telephone server from the telephone management server in the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the network node apparatus from the proxy telephone server in the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred to the media router from the network node apparatus in the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention. In the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP packet transferred from an IP terminal to another IP terminal. In the communication case 6 of 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the internal packet formed from the external IP packet sent out from the IP terminal. It is a figure explaining the registration procedure of a fixed telephone in the communication case 1 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the information exchange between telephone number servers in 8th Example of this invention. In the 8th Example of this invention, it is another figure explaining the information exchange procedure between telephone number servers. It is a figure explaining the registration procedure of a mobile telephone in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows one of the external packets used in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows one of the internal packets used in the communication case 2 of 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the position change procedure of a mobile telephone in 8th Example of this invention. In the 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the other registration procedure of a mobile telephone. It is a figure explaining the other position change procedure of a mobile telephone in 8th Example of this invention. In the 8th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the position in the IP network of the root telephone number server introduced when an IP network becomes large-scale. It is a figure which shows the communication between a root telephone number server and a high-order telephone number server in 8th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows that communication is possible between a root telephone number server and a high-order telephone number server in 8th Example of this invention. In the eighth embodiment of the present invention, when the destination telephone is a fixed telephone, a method for acquiring an IP address via a higher-order telephone number server will be described. In the eighth embodiment of the present invention, when the destination telephone is a mobile telephone, a method for acquiring an IP address via a higher-order telephone number server will be described. It is a figure which shows the example of the communication record which is not encapsulated in the network node apparatus in 7th Example of this invention. In a 7th Example of this invention, an internal packet is a figure which shows the example of the same communication as an external packet. It is a figure explaining the implementation method of ASP service in 9th Example of this invention. In the ninth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram showing an embodiment of a protocol control record and a port control record. In the 9th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the other Example of a protocol control record and a port control record. It is a figure which shows the further another Example of a protocol control record and a port control record in 9th Example of this invention. In the 9th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the flow of communication between an ASP site and a terminal. In the 9th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the packet transmitted / received between an ASP site and a terminal. In the 9th Example of this invention, it is a figure explaining the method of communicating with an ASP site by using a terminal program as a server. It is a figure which shows the packet transmitted / received between a terminal program and an ASP site in 9th Example of this invention. In the 9th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the flow of communication between a terminal program and an ASP site. In the ninth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram showing a shared use of a LAN lending service and an ASP site. In the ninth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram showing a communication flow for a LAN lending service and shared use of an ASP site. It is a figure explaining the flow of the multicast data in IP network in 10th Example of this invention. In the 10th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the record of the address management table | surface in a network node apparatus. It is a figure which shows the record of the routing table in a router in 10th Example of this invention. In the 10th Example of this invention, it is the figure which compared the communication record of the apparatus control table, and the record of an address management table. It is a figure explaining the flow of the multicast data in the IP network which connected the media router in 10th Example of this invention. It is a figure explaining the flow of the multicast data inside the IP network which connected the media router and the wireless base station in 10th Example of this invention. In the 10th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the IP network which can be multicast including a termination | terminus control part. In the 10th Example of this invention, it is a figure which shows the procedure of a multicast reception request | requirement and completion | finish. It is a figure which shows the external packet used in the procedure of a multicast reception request | requirement in 10th Example of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal packet used in the procedure of a multicast reception request | requirement in 10th Example of this invention. In the tenth embodiment of the present invention, it is the figure showing the change of the item inside the record of the address management table in the network node device 1101. It is a figure explaining the conventional encapsulation technique of an IP packet. It is a figure explaining the conventional simple encapsulation technique of an IP packet. It is a figure explaining the conventional method of operating the address management table in a network node apparatus from a user terminal. It is a figure explaining the conventional technique in which the conversion table server accesses a domain name server. It is a figure explaining the hierarchical structure of the conventional communication function when applying a common line signal system to an IP network. It is a figure explaining the conventional IP network which employ | adopted the common line signal system. It is a figure explaining the conventional concept which applies a common line signal system to an IP network. It is a figure for demonstrating the conventional connection control of the telephone to which a common line signal is applied. It is a figure for demonstrating the logical structure of GW of the prior application patent centering on line connection control. It is a figure explaining the conventional packet transfer by a multicast. It is a figure explaining the conventional packet transfer by a multicast. It is a figure explaining the conventional concept which communicates via a wireless communication path from a mobile terminal. It is a figure explaining the conventional concept regarding the telephone communication via a media router. It is a figure explaining the conventional concept regarding the telephone communication via a media router. It is a figure explaining the conventional concept regarding the structure of a media router. It is a figure explaining the conventional concept regarding the structure of a media router.

Explanation of symbols

11-1, 25, 40-1 IP network 11-2, 11-3 Network node device 23-2 Conversion table server 23-3 Domain name server 25-5 to 25-6 Connection server 25-7 Relay connection server 25- 3 to 25-4 Media router 40-2 Public switched telephone network 40-3 Termination gateway 40-4 Relay gateway 40-5 IP communication line 40-6 Control communication line 40-7 by common line signal system Voice communication line 40-8 Control IP communication line 40-9 Voice IP communication lines 41-1 and 41-2 Telephone 41-3 Media router 42-1, 42-2 Exchange 42-3 Relay control unit (STP)
42-4 Voice Control Unit with Encapsulation Function 42-5 Termination Control Unit (SEP)
43-1 Proxy telephone server 43-2 Telephone management server 43-3 Telephone number servers 43-4 and 43-5 Table management servers 44-1 and 44-2 Network node devices 44-3, 44-4, 44-5, 44-6 Router 42-3 Relay Control Unit 27-1 Multicast IP Network 27-11 to 27-20 Router 28-1 IP Terminal 33-24 to 33-27 Multicast P Service Proxy Server 33-28 to 33-31 Multicast Q service proxy server 33-32 to 33-35 Overflow communication line server 33-1 Multicast data transmission terminal 33-2 managed by communication company X Transmission office server 33-4 managed by communication company X Managed by communication company Y Multicast data transmission terminal 33-6 Transmission office server 33-7 managed by the communication company Y Terminal managed by the A newspaper company 3-3 B mobile communication network 102 a public switched telephone network by the broadcast station terminal 100 the communication company X to manage the IP network 101 the communication company Y to operational management is management (PSTN)
103 Terminal gateway 104 Termination control unit 105 Network node device 106 Relay gateway 107 Relay control unit 108 Voice control unit 113 Network node device 110, 111 Routers 112, 114, 115 Communication line 116, 153 Media router 117 Communication line 120, 121, 122 Exchange 123 Service information node 124 Signal terminal (SEP)
125 Signal Relay Station (STP)
126 speech path unit 127 speech path unit 128-1 to 128-3 relay device,
129-1 to 129-3 Communication line 130 Wireless base stations 131 and 132 of mobile communication network 101 Common line signal control communication line 133 and 134 Voice communication line 138 Radio communication line 140, 141 and 142 Telephone 152 and 160 Voice image Device 155 Relay control unit 156 Signal relay station 157 Service information node 158 Signal terminal station 159 Base station 161 Network node device 164 Control line 165 Media communication line 225, 230 Terminal 227, 228 Telephone management server 226, 229 Media router 208, 216 Transmission 209, 217 Receiver 222-1 IP network 222-2, 222-3 LAN
223-1, 223-2 Termination gateway 227, 228 Telephone management server 231, 232 Network node device 300 IP network 311 to 315 Network node device 317 to 319 Router 320 to 327 Terminal 400, 450 Relay gateway 401, 451 Relay control unit 402 , 452 to 454 Voice control unit 403, 455 Information line 404, 456 Control communication line 405, 457 based on PSTN side control IP communication line 406, 458 to 460 PSTN side voice communication lines 407, 461 to 463 Voice IP communication line 408 Address connection table 409 GW address management table 410 Signal station address management table 411 Media path connection table 415 Gateway MIB management unit 416 Line connection control unit 417 Line number management table 418 Control IP communication line in Interface 419 PSTN control line interface 420 Voice call control unit 421 Voice communication path unit 422 Media path management unit 423 Call information management unit 424 MIB management units 425 to 426 Channel state information unit 428 Channel MIB management unit 429 Channel information management 430 Voice IP communication Line interface 431 Conversion unit 432 Voice PSTN communication line interface 500 IP network 501 to 504 Network node device 505 to 508 Router 509, 510 LAN
511, 512 Terminals 513, 515 Logical communication lines 514, 516 Logical terminals 521, 522 Address management tables 526, 560, 565 32-bit IP addresses 527, 561, 566 128-bit IP addresses 530, 540, 550, 670, 580 External IP packet 531, 541, 551, 571, 581 Internal packet 600 IP network 601 to 604 Network node device 605 to 608 Router 609, 610 LAN
611, 612 Terminals 613, 615 Logical communication lines 614, 616 Logical terminals 621, 622 Address management table 626 32-bit IP address 627 128-bit IP address 630, 640, 650 External IP packet 631, 641, 651 Internal packet 700- 1, 701 Communication network 700-2 to 700-4, 702, 703 Network node device 700-5, 700-6, 704-1, 722 Device control table 700-7, 705, 706 Terminal 700-8, 710 External packet 700-11, 711 Internal packet 700-12 to 700-13, 719 Internal communication line 724 Router 725 to 727 Server 728, 729 Communication line 715 Control line 702-1 within IP network 701 Termination gateway 738 Communication record format 722 1 Device control Table 742-1 Communication record 742-2 Pointer item 742-3 Sub-table filter control record 742-4 Sub-table priority control record 742-5 Sub-table multicast control record 742-6 Sub-table signature control record 746 IP network 747-1-1 to 747-3 Network node devices 748-1 to 748-5 Terminal 754-1 Priority control record format 755 Priority control table 757 IP network 764-1, 764-3 MC control record 758-2 Network node Device 765-1 Second control record 766-30 for multicast control Device control table 770-1, 772-1 IP network 771 Signature control records 772-2 to 772-6 IP network 774-1 in IP network 772-1 774-2 Network node devices 774-3 and 774-4 Memory areas 772-7 and 7 including device control tables 2-8 terminating gateway 775-5,775-6 device control table 777-1 communication record
777-3 filter control record 777-4 priority control record 777-5 multicast control record 777-6 signature control record 779, 780, 780, 792-1, 792-2 communication record 781-1, 784-1 IP network 781- 12, 784-12 Internal packet 900 IP communication network 901-1 through 901-6 Terminal gateway 902-1 through 902-4 Radio base stations 903-1 through 903-4 for mobile communication Media routers 905-1 through 905- 4 landline telephones,
905-5 to 905-8 Mobile telephone 905-1 to 905-4 Fixed telephone 903-1 to 903-4 Media router 902-1 to 902-4 Wireless base station 905-10 to 905-17 IP packet transmission / reception function Terminal 915 Operation management server 923 of IP communication network 900, 100 CIC management table 950-1 IP communication network 950-2 Network node device 951-1 Wireless base station 951-2 IP communication line interface unit 951-3 Wireless interface unit 952- DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Analog mobile telephone 952-2 Digital mobile telephone 952-3 and 953-4 IP mobile telephone 953-1 thru | or 953-4 Radio | wireless communication path 914-1 Termination control part 905-10, 905-16 Terminal 905-16 Media router

Claims (2)

Since the mobile telephone performs telephone communication with the fixed telephone via the mobile communication network and the IP network, the mobile communication network performs telephone communication connection control, and the IP network connects the telephone communication connection control to the IP network. A terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method using an IP network, characterized in that a communication path is established by performing control and telephone communication is performed. Since the voice image apparatus 1 performs voice image communication with the voice image apparatus 2 via the mobile communication network and the IP network, the mobile communication network performs line connection control by a common line signal system, and the IP network performs telephone communication connection control. After establishing a communication path by line connection control applied to the IP network, a control procedure for establishing a voice image communication path is performed between the voice image apparatuses 1 and 2, and the voice image apparatuses 1 and 2 are connected. When the voice image communication is completed, the voice image apparatuses 1 and 2 execute a control procedure for closing the voice image communication path, and the mobile communication network is a line based on the telephone communication connection control. A terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method using an IP network, wherein the IP network is released by connection control, and the IP network releases the communication bottle by line connection control in which the telephone communication connection control is applied to the IP network.

Images